JP6910650B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a game in which a plurality of identification information is displayed in a variable manner and generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result.

Based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, a variable display device that can execute a special figure variable display game that variablely displays the special figure identification information, and a plurality of decorative identification information corresponding to the special figure variable display game. Ornamental display with variable display Based on a decorative variable display device capable of executing a variable display game, a game control device that controls the game in an integrated manner and controls the special figure variable display game, and a control signal from the game control device. , The effect control device for controlling the decoration variation display game, and when the stop result mode of the special figure variation display game becomes a predetermined special result mode, the game value can be given to the player. In a gaming machine, as a variation pattern of the special figure variation display game, a gaming machine including a variation pattern selection means for selecting a variation pattern corresponding to a plurality of types of reach variations is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). That is, a gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of types of reach effects is known.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-138827

However, conventional gaming machines have not been able to sufficiently enhance the interest of reach production.
An object of the present invention is to enhance the interest of reach production.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that can generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when a game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is executed and the result of the game becomes a special result.
A variation pattern selection means for selecting the variation pattern of the game, and
A variation effect means for executing a variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means is provided.
The variable effect means includes a first reach effect, a first specific reach effect different from the first reach effect, and a second specific reach effect different from the first reach effect and the first specific reach effect. It is possible to execute a reach effect including the game and a pseudo-continuous effect capable of performing a pseudo-variable display in which the variable display of the identification information is simulated a plurality of times in one game.
The variation pattern selecting means, a variation pattern for executing the reach demonstration,
A first pattern that performs the second Japanese theorem over switch effect after execution of the first reach demonstration,
A second pattern that performs the second Japanese theorem over switch effect after the execution of the pseudo communication effect,
A third pattern that performs the first reach demonstration, the second Japanese theorem over switch directing without performing the first specific reach effect and the pseudo communication effect,
A fourth pattern in which the first specific reach effect is executed after the execution of the first reach effect, and
The first reach demonstration, a fifth pattern for executing the first specific reach effect without executing the pseudo communication effect, Ri selectable der a
The first pattern, the second pattern, the third pattern, the fourth pattern, and the fifth pattern are either a case where the result of the game is not a special result or a case where the result of the game is a special result. But it is a variable pattern that can be selected,
If the result of the game is not a special result, the selectivity of the first pattern, the second pattern, the third pattern, the fourth pattern and the fifth pattern is different.
When the result of the game is a special result, the selectivity of the first pattern, the second pattern, the third pattern, the fourth pattern, and the fifth pattern is common .

According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the interest of reach production.

It is a front view of the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is an exploded perspective view and the side view of the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the lower plate unit. It is a figure explaining the lower plate unit. It is a figure explaining the front frame unit. It is a figure explaining the front frame unit. It is a figure explaining the front frame unit. It is a figure explaining the speaker decoration. It is a figure explaining the hitting ball launching apparatus and the foul ball catching unit. It is a figure explaining the hitting ball launching apparatus. It is a figure explaining the foul ball catch unit. It is a figure explaining the foul ball catch unit. It is a figure explaining the foul ball catch unit. It is a figure explaining the precision plate unit. It is a figure explaining the effect button. It is a figure explaining the unit main body part. It is a figure explaining the water storage mechanism. It is a figure explaining the water storage mechanism. It is a figure explaining the water storage mechanism. It is a figure explaining the water storage mechanism. It is a figure explaining the viewing window part. It is a figure explaining the viewing window part. It is a figure explaining the front frame light emitting unit. It is a figure explaining the front frame light emitting unit. It is a figure explaining the front frame light emitting unit. It is a figure explaining the sphere flow path unit. It is a figure explaining the sphere flow path unit. It is a figure explaining the sphere flow path unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in a special game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting change / confirmation process. It is a figure explaining the display in a performance display device. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the common processing of a special figure start port switch. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead jackpot determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating game processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining game processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining game processing. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure 1 fluctuation start process and a special figure 2 change start process. It is a flowchart explaining the fall lottery process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating an information setting process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure 2 information setting process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern setting process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the fluctuation start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the time shortening fluctuation number update process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of special figure 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 1 and the jackpot end setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 3. It is a flowchart explaining the process in small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing of an effect control device. It is a flowchart explaining the received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command analysis process. It is a figure explaining an example of a look-ahead effect. It is a figure explaining an example of reach production. It is a figure explaining an example of reach production. It is a figure explaining an example of reach production. It is a figure explaining an example of reach production. It is a figure explaining an example of reach production.

<First Embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12
Is assembled to the outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. Game board 30 (see FIG. 30)
Is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Also, the front frame (
A glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the main body frame) 12.

A model name and the like display unit 16 for displaying the model name and the like of the gaming machine 10 is provided on the upper portion of the glass frame 15.
In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, and decorations, effects, and notifications when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) with (), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the lower part of the glass frame 15, the upper plate (storage plate) 21 for supplying the game ball to the hit ball launcher 240 (see FIG. 10) and the payout unit provided on the back surface side of the game machine 10 are paid out. An upper plate ball outlet 22 or the like is provided so that the pachinko ball can flow out. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a (see FIG. 32) for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, the effect button 25 also has a built-in drive source (vibration motor 251a (see FIG. 16) which is a kind of frame effect device) for vibrating the effect button 25. That is, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a vibration function that gives a predetermined notification by vibrating the effect button 25. In addition, production button 2
Reference numeral 5 may be configured so as to be convertible from a normal state (a state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2) to a protruding state (a state in which the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 is above the normal state).

At the lower part of the front frame 12, a lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game balls paid out when the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device 240, and the like are provided. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.

Further, to the right of the effect button 25, there is a lending button (ball lending button) 27a that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card is ejected from the card unit of the ball lending machine. Return button (discharge button) 27b to operate, balance indicator (balance display) 27c to display the balance of the prepaid card, upper plate operation lever to operate to let the game ball in the upper plate 21 flow down to the lower plate 23 27d, a mobile terminal holder 28 and the like for placing a mobile terminal such as a smartphone owned by the player are provided. Further, on the left side of the effect button 25, a volume adjusting button 27e, a cross key 29, and the like are provided.
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device 240 transfers the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30.
Fire towards. In addition, the player operates the effect button 25 and the cross key 29 to display a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 30).
In the above, it is possible to perform an effect or the like in which the operation of the player is intervened.

FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 3B is a left side view of the gaming machine 10.
For example, as shown in FIG. 3A, the front frame 12 includes an inner frame unit 12a and a lower plate unit 12b mounted on the lower portion of the inner frame unit 12a on the front surface side. Further, the glass frame 15 includes a front frame unit 15a and a top unit 15b mounted on the upper portion of the front frame unit 15a on the front surface side.

Of the parts surrounding the game board 30 of the front frame unit 15a, the lower part 15a1 (upper plate 21)
The left side portion 15a2 and the right side portion 15a3 are formed of black members.
During the game, the player pays attention to the game board 30 (particularly the display device 41 and the winning opening), but at that time, the part surrounding the game board 30 is also in sight, so a low-brightness color is selected as the color of that part. By doing so, it is possible to alleviate the oppressive feeling given to the player by the game board 30 (including the portion surrounding the game board 30).

Further, by selecting a low-brightness color as the color of the portion surrounding the game board 30, the low-brightness portion is provided on the light emitting device (for example, the board decoration device 46) provided on the game board 30 and the glass frame 15. Because it can be separated from the light emitting device (for example, frame decoration device 18 etc.)
It is possible to make the light emission of the light emitting device provided on the glass frame 15 stand out. Further, when the effect button 25 is configured to be convertible to a protruding state, the effect button 25 overlaps the lower portion 15a1 in the front-rear direction when the effect button 25 is in the protruding state. That is, when the effect button 25 is in the protruding state, the appearance of the low-brightness portion changes, so that it is possible to suppress overlooking the state change of the effect button 25. The color of the portion surrounding the game board 30 (lower portion 15a1, left portion 15a2, right portion 15a3) is not limited to black as long as it is a low-brightness color.

A model name display unit 16 is provided on the front surface of the top unit 15b. The model name display unit 16 is configured by sandwiching a sheet on which the model name is displayed between a clear cover that protects the front surface (display surface) of the sheet and a base member, and only the sheet is replaced. You can change the model name with. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the entire top unit 15b for each model, so that the cost can be reduced.
The top unit 15b alleviates the oppressive feeling given to the player.
From the viewpoint of enhancing the effect of b, the top unit 15b may be configured to perform a predetermined operation such as a forward / backward movement operation or a vertical movement operation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the front side of the top unit 15b is inclined so that the upper end is located on the front side of the lower end. That is, the top unit 15b faces the player side sitting in front of the gaming machine 10. As a result, the top unit 15b can be made to look larger, so that the effect of the top unit 15b can be enhanced.
Further, the degree of protrusion of the upper part of the gaming machine 10 to the front is substantially the same as the degree of protrusion of the lower part of the gaming machine 10 to the front. The degree is slightly larger than the degree of protrusion at the bottom. It should be noted that the degree of protrusion of the upper portion may be smaller than the degree of protrusion of the lower portion, and with such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player hits his head against the top unit 15b. Become.

<Lower plate unit>
FIG. 4A is a perspective view of the lower plate unit 12b as viewed from the front right side, and FIG. 4B is a perspective view.
It is a perspective view of the lower plate unit 12b seen from the front left side. FIG. 5A shows the lower plate unit 12
It is a plan view of b, FIG. 5 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 5 (a), and FIG. 5 (c).
) Is an enlarged view of a main part in FIG. 5 (b).
For example, as shown in FIG. 4A, a call button 27f operated by a player to call a clerk of a game store is provided on the left side of the lower plate 23. When the call button 27f is operated, a signal is transmitted to the data lamp in the game store as external information, and the data lamp lights up.

For example, as shown in FIG. 4B, the flow path in which the game ball flows down from the payout unit to the lower plate 23 and the downstream portion 231 of the flow path in which the game ball flows down from the upper plate 21 to the lower plate 23 are the same. The upper surface is covered with the cover member 231a. The downstream portion 231 also serves as a storage space for storing game balls when the lower plate 23 is full.
The cover member 231a is a transparent member, and when the surface is damaged, the cover member 231a turns whitish. When a fraudulent act using a foul ball (second fraudulent act described later) is performed, the thread member rubs against the cover member 231a and the surface of the cover member 231a is scratched. It is possible to confirm whether or not cheating has been committed. In addition, the cover member 231
Since a is detachably provided on the lower plate unit 12b, only the cover member 213a can be replaced. Therefore, it is difficult to find a new scratch (a new fraudulent act) when the cover member 231a is damaged, but the cover member 231a
If the cover member 231a is replaced, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not a new fraudulent act has been performed.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 4B and 5A, the lower plate 23 has a ball discharge port 232 that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction and an opening / closing door that opens and closes the ball discharge port 232. A 233 and a lower plate ball removing lever 234 are provided. By operating the lower plate ball removing lever 234, the opening / closing door 233 can be opened, and the game ball in the lower plate 23 can be discharged downward from the ball discharge port 232. The ball discharge port 232 has a substantially circular shape when viewed from the vertical direction, and has a diameter D3 (FIG. 5).
(See (c)) is about 35 mm (that is, three times or more the diameter of the game ball). Therefore, the game ball in the lower plate 23 can be smoothly discharged from the ball discharge port 232.

For example, as shown in FIG. 4B, the lower surface of the lower plate 23 (that is, the upper surface of the bottom surface portion of the lower plate 23) is inclined toward the ball discharge port 232. Therefore, even when the number of game balls in the lower plate 23 is small, the game balls in the lower plate 23 can be smoothly discharged from the ball discharge port 232.
Further, the distance D1 (see FIG. 4B) between the end (exit) of the downstream portion 231 and the ball discharge port 232 is set to about 9 mm (that is, less than the diameter of the game ball). Therefore, the lower plate 2
When the number of game balls in 3 is small, the game balls that have flowed out from the downstream portion 231 immediately open and close the door 2
Since it moves on 33 and stays on the opening / closing door 233, the game balls in the lower plate 23 can be smoothly discharged from the ball discharge port 232 even when the number of game balls in the lower plate 23 is small.

For example, as shown in FIG. 4B, the left end of the cover member 231a is the end of the downstream portion 231 (
It is located on the left side of the exit), and as shown in FIG. 5A, for example, the cover member 231a
The left end portion of is overlapped with a part of the ball discharge port 232 in the vertical direction. That is, the downstream part 231
At the end of the eaves, an eave that protrudes toward the ball discharge port 232 side is provided. As a result, the upper surface opening of the lower plate 23 is reduced (that is, the intrusion of dust and the like into the lower plate 23 is suppressed) while securing the capacity of the lower plate 23.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 5B, the rear surface 23a in the lower plate 23 is inclined so that the lower end is located behind the upper end. As a result, the capacity of the lower plate 23 is increased without enlarging the upper surface opening of the lower plate 23.

Further, since the rear surface 23a in the lower plate 23 is inclined so that the lower end is located on the rear side of the upper end, when the player manually scrapes the game ball from the lower plate 23, the scraping operation is performed. Cheap. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 4B, a step portion 235 which is one step deeper in the rear surface 23a.
Is provided. Therefore, when the game ball is scraped out by hand, the step portion 235 becomes a space for bending the finger, so that the scraping operation becomes easier.

For example, as shown in FIG. 5C, the distance D21 between the upper surface of the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 and the lower surface of the bottom surface is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Specifically, for example, the game ball. Diameter of 1.5
It is set to be more than double and less than twice the diameter of the game ball. In addition, in FIG. 5C, the game ball is shown by the alternate long and short dash line.
Further, the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 and the upper surface of the opening / closing door 233 is less than the diameter of the game ball, and specifically, for example, about 0.5 times the diameter of the game ball. It is set.
Therefore, since the opening / closing door 233 is one step lower than the upper surface of the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, the game ball tends to stay on the opening / closing door 233. Further, since the step (distance D22) is smaller than the diameter of the game ball and the game ball on the opening / closing door 233 can be easily scraped out, the game ball can be easily taken out from the lower plate 23.

Further, since the step (distance D22) is set to about 0.5 times the diameter of the game ball, the game ball sandwiched between the opening / closing door 233 (specifically, the peripheral surface of the ball discharge port 232 and the opening / closing door 233). When the game ball (the game ball sandwiched between the side of the door) returns to the top, it easily returns to the inside of the lower plate 23. That is, if the step (distance D22) is too small, the game ball sandwiched between the opening / closing doors 233 may be pushed out vigorously by the closing force of the opening / closing door 233 and pop out from the lower plate 23. teeth,
Since the step (distance D22) is set to about 0.5 times the diameter of the game ball, the opening / closing door 233
Even if it is pushed out vigorously by the closing force of, the inconvenience of popping out from the lower plate 23 is unlikely to occur, and it is easy to return to the inside of the lower plate 23.

Further, the distance D23 between the lower surface of the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 and the lower surface of the opening / closing door 233 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, and specifically, for example, about 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball. It is set.
Therefore, when the opening / closing door 233 is opened and the game ball in the lower plate 23 is discharged from the ball discharge port 232, the game ball is guided downward (guided toward the lower ball box) by the ball discharge port 232. Can be done. Furthermore, when the game ball sandwiched between the opening / closing door 233 comes out downward, it is difficult to scatter even if it is pushed out vigorously by the closing force of the opening / closing door 233 (the direction of scattering is restricted by the ball discharge port 232), so that it is outside the ball box. The inconvenience of falling into the door is unlikely to occur.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the storage portion (lower plate 23) capable of storing the gaming balls.
In the gaming machine provided with, the storage unit has a through hole (ball discharge port 232) for discharging the stored game ball, an opening / closing member (opening / closing door 233) for opening and closing the through hole, and an opening / closing member (opening / closing door 233) on the bottom surface of the storage unit. With
The distance D23 between the lower surface of the bottom surface and the lower surface of the opening / closing member is longer than the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom surface and the upper surface of the opening / closing member (see FIG. 5C).
Therefore, the usability of the storage unit (lower plate 23) can be improved. In particular,
Since the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom surface and the upper surface of the opening / closing member is shorter than the distance D23 between the lower surface of the bottom surface and the lower surface of the opening / closing member, the storage unit is used when the game ball in the storage unit is manually taken out. The game ball fitted in the step (distance D22) between the upper surface of the bottom surface portion and the upper surface of the opening / closing member (opening / closing door 233), that is, the game ball on the opening / closing member can be easily scraped out, which is convenient. In addition, when the number of game balls in the storage unit is small, the game balls are accumulated on the opening / closing member. Therefore, even when the number of game balls in the storage unit is small, the game balls in the storage unit are pierced through the holes (ball discharge port 232). Can be discharged smoothly from. Further, since the distance D23 between the lower surface of the bottom surface portion and the lower surface of the opening / closing member is longer than the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom surface portion and the upper surface of the opening / closing member, when the game ball in the storage portion is discharged from the through hole. The through hole can guide the game ball downward, which is convenient.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom surface portion and the upper surface of the opening / closing member (opening / closing door 233) is less than the diameter of the game ball, and the lower surface of the bottom surface portion and the lower surface of the opening / closing member. The distance D23 between and the ball can be configured to be greater than or equal to the diameter of the gaming ball.
With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the usability of the storage unit (lower plate 23). Specifically, since the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom surface and the upper surface of the opening / closing member (opening / closing door 233) is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, when the game ball in the storage unit is taken out by hand, the storage unit The step (distance D22) between the upper surface of the bottom surface and the upper surface of the opening / closing member (opening / closing door 233) does not interfere with the operation of scraping the game ball, and is easy to use. Further, since the distance D23 between the lower surface of the bottom surface portion and the lower surface of the opening / closing member is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, the through hole is used when the game ball in the storage portion is discharged from the through hole (ball discharge port 232). The game ball can be guided downward with high accuracy, and it is easy to use.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine provided with a storage unit (lower plate 23) capable of storing game balls, the storage unit stores the stored game balls on the bottom surface of the storage unit. A through hole for discharging (ball discharge port 232) and an opening / closing member (opening / closing door 233) for opening and closing the through hole are provided, and the width of the through hole (diameter D3 of the ball discharge port 232) opens and closes with the upper surface of the bottom surface. Distance D from the upper surface of the member
Greater than 22 (see FIG. 5 (c)).
Therefore, the usability of the storage unit (lower plate 23) can be improved. In particular,
Since the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom surface and the upper surface of the opening / closing member is smaller than the width of the through hole (diameter D3 of the ball discharge port 232), the bottom surface of the storage unit is used when the game ball in the storage unit is manually taken out. The game ball fitted in the step (distance D22) between the upper surface of the portion and the upper surface of the opening / closing member (opening / closing door 233), that is, the game ball on the opening / closing member can be easily scraped out, which is convenient. In addition, when the number of game balls in the storage unit is small, the game balls are accumulated on the opening / closing member. Therefore, even when the number of game balls in the storage unit is small, the game balls in the storage unit are pierced through the holes (ball discharge port 232). Can be discharged smoothly from. Further, since the width of the through hole (diameter D3 of the ball discharge port 232) is larger than the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom surface portion and the upper surface of the opening / closing member, the game ball in the storage portion can be smoothly discharged from the through hole. It is easy to use.
In the present embodiment, the ball discharge port 232 has a substantially circular shape when viewed from the vertical direction.
The shape of the ball discharge port 232 can be changed as appropriate, and may have a substantially elliptical shape when viewed from the vertical direction, for example. When the ball discharge port 232 has a substantially elliptical shape, for example, the minor diameter of the ball discharge port 232 corresponds to the width of the through hole.

<Front frame unit>
FIG. 6A is an exploded perspective view of the front frame unit 15a, and FIG. 6B is a rear view (rear view) of the front frame unit 15a. FIG. 7 is a side sectional view of the front frame unit 15a.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, the front frame unit 15a is a speaker decoration attached to the front frame main body 151 and the upper left and upper right portions on the front side of the front frame main body 151, respectively. 1
52, an upper plate unit 153 mounted on the lower portion of the front frame main body 151 on the front side, and a front frame light emitting unit 154 mounted on each of the left and right front sides of the front frame main body 151. It is configured to include a cover member 155 attached to each of the upper left portion and the upper right portion on the rear surface side of the front frame main body portion 151.

For example, as shown in FIG. 6A, the upper left portion and the upper right portion on the front side of the front frame main body portion 151 are
An upper speaker 19a is attached to each. The upper speaker 19a on the left side is attached in an inclined state so that the upper end is located on the front side of the lower end and the left end is located on the front side of the right end. Further, the upper speaker 19a on the right side is attached in a state of being tilted so that the upper end is located on the front side of the lower end and the right end is located on the front side of the left end. That is, both the left and right upper speakers 19a are attached in a state in which the sound radiated from the front side thereof is tilted diagonally downward and inward.

The upper speaker 19a is covered with the speaker decoration 152 from the front. That is, the speaker decoration 152 prevents the sound from the upper speaker 19a from being directly transmitted to the player. Specifically, the sound radiated from the front side of the upper speaker 19a is reflected by the speaker decoration 152 toward the cover glass 14, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 7, and then is reflected by the cover glass 14 to the gaming machine. It is reflected toward the player who sits in front of 10. Therefore, when the sound from the upper speaker 19a is high-pitched, the player may feel uncomfortable if the sound is directly transmitted to the player, but in the case of the present embodiment, the sound is not directly transmitted to the player, so that the player You can reduce discomfort and increase your interest. Further, when the sound from the upper speaker 19a (particularly the bass) collides with the cover glass 14, it sounds as if the sound is output from the entire cover glass 14, which enhances the interest. Further, since the sound from the upper speaker 19a can be restricted from leaking to the outside by the speaker decoration 152, the sound from the upper speaker 19a can be easily heard, which enhances the interest.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the lower portion of the upper speaker 19a on the rear surface side is covered with a cover glass 1.
It is separated from 4. Therefore, the sound radiated from the lower part on the rear surface side of the upper speaker 19a is
For example, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 7, it is reflected by the cover glass 14 and faces the player sitting in front of the gaming machine 10. Therefore, not only the sound radiated from the front side of the upper speaker 19a but also a part of the sound radiated from the rear side of the upper speaker 19a can be transmitted to the player, so that the volume can be suppressed.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 6B and 7, the upper speaker 19a has the cover member 1 from the rear.
Since it is covered with 55, the sound radiated from the rear surface side of the upper speaker 19a is covered by the cover member 15.
It can be confined inside 5. Therefore, the sound from the upper speaker 19a is the game machine 1
It is possible to suppress leakage to the rear of 0.
Further, by running the wiring from the upper speaker 19a on the outer surface of the cover member 155, the wiring from the upper speaker 19a can be kept away from the cover glass 14, so that the cover glass 14 can be easily attached and detached. Further, the cover member 155 also has a role of preventing an illegal act such as a piano wire or the like from entering the inside of the gaming machine 10 through a gap between the upper speaker 19a and the glass frame 15. In FIG. 6B, the upper speaker 19a is not shown.

FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the gaming machine 10. FIG. 9A shows the speaker decoration 152 on the right side.
9 (b) is a perspective view of the speaker decoration 152 on the right side as viewed from the front left side.
For example, as shown in FIG. 8, a top light emitting portion 15b1 which is a kind of frame decoration device 18 is provided on the right side of the top unit 15b. Similarly, a top light emitting portion 15b1 which is a kind of frame decoration device 18 is provided on the left side of the top unit 15b. By emitting light from the top light emitting unit 15b1, it is possible to appeal to the players on the side of the game machine 10 (such as the island entrance of the game store).

For example, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 (a) and 9 (b), the speaker decoration 152 is provided with a diffuse reflection portion 152a that diffusely reflects light, and an upper reflection portion 152b and a lower reflection portion 152c that reflect light. Has been done.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the diffusely reflecting portion 152a has a random uneven surface, and by diffusely reflecting light on the uneven surface, the diffused reflecting portion 152a emits light rearward from the top light emitting portion 15b1. The generated light can be reflected toward the front, the upper reflecting portion 152b, and the lower reflecting portion 152c.

Further, the upper reflecting portion 152b includes a plurality of first reflecting surfaces that reflect light relatively toward the front side.
It has a plurality of second reflecting surfaces that reflect light relatively toward the rear side, and the light from the top light emitting unit 15b1 (from the top light emitting unit 15b1) by the first reflecting surface and the second reflecting surface. (Including light incident through the diffused reflection unit 152a) is reflected. The first reflecting surface and the second reflecting surface are arranged alternately, the first reflecting surface faces the front side from the second reflecting surface, and the width W1 of the first reflecting surface is the width of the second reflecting surface. Is almost the same as.
Further, the lower reflecting portion 152c includes a plurality of third reflecting surfaces that reflect light relatively toward the front side.
It has a plurality of fourth reflecting surfaces that reflect light relatively toward the rear side, and the light from the top light emitting unit 15b1 (from the top light emitting unit 15b1) by the third reflecting surface and the fourth reflecting surface. (Including light incident through the diffuse reflection unit 152a and / or the upper reflection unit 152b) is reflected. The third reflecting surface and the fourth reflecting surface are arranged alternately, the third reflecting surface faces the front side from the fourth reflecting surface, and the width W2 of the third reflecting surface is the width of the fourth reflecting surface. Is almost the same as.

Since the lower reflecting portion 152c is farther from the top light emitting portion 15b1 than the upper reflecting portion 152b, the amount of light incident on the lower reflecting portion 152c is smaller than the amount of light incident on the upper reflecting portion 152b. Therefore, the width W2 of the third reflecting surface of the lower reflecting portion 152c is set to the upper reflecting portion 152b.
When the width W1 of the first reflecting surface is the same, the amount of light reflected forward by the lower reflecting portion 152c is smaller than the amount of light reflected forward by the upper reflecting portion 152b, and the lower reflecting portion The 152c looks darker than the upper reflecting portion 152b. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the amount of light reflected forward by the lower reflecting portion 152c and the amount of light reflected forward by the upper reflecting portion 152b are equal to each other on the third reflecting surface of the lower reflecting portion 152c. Width W2
Is wider than the width W1 of the first reflecting surface of the upper reflecting portion 152b. As described above, in the present embodiment, the amount of light reflected by the upper reflecting portion 152b and the lower reflecting portion 152c is adjusted by the width of the reflecting surface of the upper reflecting portion 152b and the lower reflecting portion 152c.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower reflecting portion 152c so that the amount of light reflected forward by the lower reflecting portion 152c and the amount of light reflected forward by the upper reflecting portion 152b are equal to each other.
The direction of the third reflecting surface of the above is different from the direction of the first reflecting surface of the upper reflecting portion 152b. Specifically, since the third reflecting surface faces the outside of the first reflecting surface, the light from the outside of the gaming machine 10 (for example, the light from the adjacent gaming machine) is third than the first reflecting surface. It is often incident on the reflecting surface.
That is, the lower reflecting portion 152c is configured so that the small amount of incident light from the top light emitting portion 15b1 can be compensated for by the amount of incident light from the outside. As described above, in the present embodiment, the amount of light reflected by the upper reflecting portion 152b and the lower reflecting portion 152c is adjusted according to the orientation of the reflecting surfaces of the upper reflecting portion 152b and the lower reflecting portion 152c.
Further, the third reflecting surface of the lower reflecting portion 152c is located outside the first reflecting surface of the upper reflecting portion 152b and faces the outside of the first reflecting surface of the upper reflecting portion 152b. As a result, the top unit 15b can be made to look larger at the time of light emission, so that the effect of the top unit 15b can be enhanced.

<Striking ball launcher and foul ball catching unit>
FIG. 10 is a front view of the inner frame unit 12a, which is an enlarged view of the lower part of the inner frame unit 12a.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 10, a foul ball catching unit 210 and a foul ball launching device 240 are mounted on the lower portion of the inner frame unit 12a on the front surface side. The game ball stored in the upper plate 21 is supplied to the hit ball launching device 240 arranged at the lower part of the front frame 12. The game ball ejected by the launching punch 241 of the hitting ball launching device 240 is formed in the lower right portion of the front frame 12 so as to be inclined upward from the lower right to the upper left, and the gaming area 3 is formed by the launch rail 242.
You will be guided to 2. When the launching force is weak, the game ball launched from the ball striking device 240 fouls as a foul ball (a game ball returned without being launched into the game area 32), for example, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. Collected by the ball catch unit 210 and the lower plate 23
Is supplied to.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10, the hitting ball launching device 240 is a game ball (illegal ball) to which a thread is attached.
Is provided with a cutting blade 243 that cuts the thread when the ball is launched from the ball launching device 240.
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game ball (illegal ball) to which a thin thread (thread member) is attached is launched into the game area 32, and the thread member is operated from the upper plate 21 to illegally enter a winning opening or the like. There may be cheating to win a prize. As a countermeasure against fraudulent acts using such fraudulent balls, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a cutting blade 243 that cuts a thread member of the fraudulent ball.

11 (a) is a front view of the hitting ball launching device 240, FIG. 11 (b) is a front side perspective view of the hitting ball launching device 240, and FIG. 11 (c) is a front side perspective view of the cutting blade 243. It is a figure.
For example, as shown in FIG. 11A, the ball launching device 240 is in front (glass frame 15 side).
A guide path 244 is provided to guide the game ball supplied from the taxiing to the launch position. Pachinko machine 1
Reference numeral 0 is provided with a supply path (not shown) for supplying the game ball stored in the upper plate 21 to the hitting ball launching device 240. That is, the gaming machine 10 has a supply path (not shown) provided on the glass frame 15 side and a front frame 12 side as a passage for guiding the gaming ball stored in the upper plate 21 to the launching position of the ball launching device 240. It is provided with a guide path 244 provided in. When the glass frame 15 is in the closed state, the outlet portion of the supply path and the inlet portion 244a of the guide path 244 are connected so that the supply path and the guide path 244 communicate with each other.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, the inlet portion 244a of the guide path 244 is provided on the cover member 245 of the ball launching device 240. The inlet portion 244a is a cover member 24.
It is formed as an opening penetrating 5 in the front-rear direction.
The cover member 245 is provided with a thread guiding portion 246 capable of guiding the thread member of the illegal ball toward the cutting edge portion of the cutting blade 243 when the illegal ball is launched. The thread guide portion 246 is a cover member 24.
It is an opening that penetrates 5 in the front-rear direction, and is cut out so as to be connected to the upper portion of the left end of the entrance portion 244a of the guide path 244. That is, the thread guide portion 246 and the inlet portion 244a are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. The cutting blade 243 is attached to the cover member 245 so that the cutting edge portion thereof is located inside the thread guiding portion 246.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11C, the cutting blade 243 has a flat plate-shaped base end portion 243a and a flat plate-shaped first plate-shaped first end portion 243a that is connected to the base end portion 243a and extends in the same plane as the base end portion 243a. Tip 2
It includes a 43b and a flat plate-shaped second tip portion 243c that is connected to the base end portion 243a and is bent rearward from the base end portion 243a. The first tip portion 243b and the second tip portion 243c are arranged side by side in the upper and lower directions, and a gap portion 2 formed between (boundary) between the tip portions 243b and 243c.
43d is a cutting portion for cutting the thread member of the illegal ball.
Tip surface 243b1 (right side surface) of the first tip portion 243b and tip surface 2 of the second tip portion 243c
43c1 (right side surface) has a gap portion 24 so as to guide the thread member of the illegal ball to the gap portion 243d.
It is formed as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward 3d. The cutting blade 243 is fixed to the cover member 245 in a state of being accommodated in the accommodating recess formed on the rear surface side of the cover member 245.

In the cutting mechanism configured as described above, when the illegal ball is launched by the hitting ball launching device 240, the thread member of the illegal ball is guided to the cutting blade 243 by the thread guiding portion 246, and the cutting blade 243. It bites into the gap 243d of. Then, the thread member that bites into the gap 243d is pulled and cut by the firing force of the illegal ball. The thread guide portion 246 is cut out at the end of the inlet portion 244a so as to be connected to the inlet portion 244a of the guide path 244, and the cutting blade 24
Since 3 is arranged at a recessed position of the thread guide portion 246, it does not hinder the flow of the game ball.
It is possible to cut the thread member of an illegal ball.

The launch rail 242 is configured to guide the game ball launched from the launch position to the upper left. The thread guide portion 246 is formed so as to be connected to the left end portion of the inlet portion 244a of the guide path 244, and the cutting blade 243 is arranged so that the cutting edge portion thereof faces the right side. In this way, the thread guiding portion 246 is provided on the side portion of the inlet portion 244a on the game ball launching direction side, and the cutting blade 243 is provided.
By providing the cutting edge portion of the ball in the direction opposite to the game ball launching direction, it is possible to more reliably cut the thread member of the illegal ball.

FIG. 12A is a front view of the foul ball catch unit 210, and FIG. 12B is an exploded perspective view of the foul ball catch unit 210. FIG. 13A is a perspective view of the upper surface of the foul ball catch unit 210, and FIG. 13B is a perspective view of the rear surface of the foul ball catch unit 210. FIG. 14A shows a foul ball catch unit 21.
0 is a rear view (rear view), FIG. 14 (b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 14 (a), and FIG. 14 (c) is an enlarged view of a main part in FIG. 14 (b). It is a figure.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, the foul ball catch unit 210 includes a base member 211 and a part member 212 mounted on the rear surface side of the base member 211. On the front side of the base member 211, a caution display 211a for calling attention to the hook 210a for locking the foul ball catch unit 210 to the inner frame unit 12a is provided.

For example, as shown in FIG. 13A, the foul ball catch unit 210 is a foul ball (a game ball that has flowed back without being launched into the game area 32 even though it was launched) on the rear surface side of the base member 211. The first foul ball inflow port 213a and the second foul ball inflow port 213b into which the ball flows in, the payout ball inflow port 213c into which the game ball paid out with the upper plate 21 full, and the inflow port 213a, It is provided with a ball outlet 213d for discharging the game ball flowing into the 213b and 213c to the outside of the foul ball catch unit 210.
The game ball discharged from the ball outlet 213d is supplied to the lower plate 23.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 14A, the foul ball catch unit 210 has a first flow path 214a on the rear surface side of the base member 211, through which the game ball flowing into the first foul ball inflow port 213a flows down. Second flow path 214b through which the game ball that has flowed into the payout ball inflow port 213c flows down.
The third flow path 214c that guides the game ball that has passed through the first flow path 214a and the second flow path 214b to the ball outlet 213d, and the game ball that has flowed into the second foul ball inlet 213b are sent to the ball outlet 21.
It is provided with a fourth flow path 214d for guiding to 3d.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12A, the base member 211 is provided with a window portion 211b for preventing static electricity from accumulating. The window portion 211b is an opening that penetrates the base member 211 in the front-rear direction, and the base member 2 is formed from the front side of the base member 211 via the window portion 211b.
The game ball in the flow path provided on the rear surface side of 11 can be visually recognized.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 12B, a reinforcing rib 211 for reinforcing the base member 211 is provided with a flow path on the rear side on the front side of the base member 211 on which the game ball flows down.
c is projected. The reinforcing rib 211c also has a role of preventing sink marks during molding.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12B, the part member 212 has a protrusion 21 protruding upward.
2a and a reinforcing rib 212b for the protrusion 212a are provided.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 14 (a), the protrusion 212a is arranged between the first foul ball inflow port 213a and the second foul ball inflow port 213b. The second foul ball inflow port 213b is on the right side of the first foul ball inflow port 213a (on the ball launching device 240 side).
The foul ball that could not cross the protrusion 212a at the time of launch flows into the second foul ball inflow port 213b. On the other hand, a foul ball that has crossed the protrusion 212a at the time of launch may flow into the first foul ball inlet 213a if the foul ball cannot cross the protrusion 212a at the time of backflow, and may cross the protrusion 212a at the time of backflow. If it is possible, it will flow into the second foul ball inflow port 213b.

For example, as shown in FIG. 13B, the foul ball catch unit 210 sandwiches the thread when the game ball (illegal ball) to which the thread is attached flows into the first foul ball inflow port 213a as a foul ball. The unit 215 is provided.
In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, as described above, a gaming ball (thread member) to which a thin thread (thread member) is attached (
A fraudulent act (hereinafter referred to as "first fraudulent act") may be performed by firing an illegal ball) into the game area 32 and operating the thread member from the upper plate 21 to illegally win a prize in the winning opening or the like. .. The first cheating can be avoided by the cutting blade 243 of the hitting ball launching device 240.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, two game balls are further connected by a thin thread (thread member), and one game ball is launched to intentionally make a foul ball (that is, a foul ball catch is intentionally made). After collecting it in the unit 210 and dropping it on the lower plate 23), the other game ball is placed in the game area 32.
By firing inside and operating the thread member from the lower plate 23, a fraudulent act (hereinafter referred to as "second fraudulent act") of illegally winning a prize in the winning opening or the like may be performed. The second fraudulent act is that the hand operating the thread member is hidden by the lower plate 23 and is difficult to see, and the operation of operating the thread member is mistaken for the operation of moving the game ball from the lower plate 23 to the upper plate 21. Hard to find for some reason.

In the case of the second fraudulent act, since the firing force of one of the game balls launched first is weak, the thread member is not cut even if it bites into the gap 243d of the cutting blade 243. Furthermore, the thread member is the cutting blade 243.
Even if it bites into the gap portion 243d of the thread member, the thread member is detached from the cutting blade 243 by firing the other game ball after that. Therefore, the second fraudulent activity cannot be avoided by the cutting blade 243. As a countermeasure against such a second fraudulent act, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is
It is provided with a sandwiching portion 215 for sandwiching a thread member of an illegal ball.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 13 (b) and 14 (b), the sandwiching portion 215 is a base member 21.
It is a gap formed between (boundary) the front protruding portion 216 that protrudes rearward provided in 1 and the rear protruding portion 217 that protrudes forward provided in the part member 212.
The first flow path 214a provided on the rear surface side of the base member 211 is the first foul ball inflow port 2
It is a flow path formed so as to guide the game ball flowing into 13a to the left and then downward.
The upstream portion (the portion that guides the game ball to the left) of the first flow path 214a is provided between the base member 211 and the part member 212, and the game ball has protrusions 216 and 216 when passing through the upstream portion.
It rolls on the upper surface of 217 (that is, above the sandwiching portion 215).

Further, the third flow path 214c provided on the rear surface side of the base member 211 is the first flow path 214a.
It is a flow path formed so as to guide the game ball from the second flow path 214b to the right. The third flow path 214c is provided below the protrusions 216 and 217 (that is, below the sandwiching portion 215). Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the first foul ball inflow port 213a moves to the left above the sandwiching portion 215 and falls from the protrusions 216 and 217, and then moves to the right below the sandwiching portion 215. It is discharged from the ball outlet 213d.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14B, the sandwiching portion 215 is a slit extending along the left-right direction. Therefore, when the game ball rolls above the sandwiching portion 215 (flows down the upstream portion of the first flow path 214a), it also rolls below the sandwiching portion 215 (third flow path 214c). When (flowing down), it also flows down along the extending direction of the sandwiching portion 215.
For example, as shown in FIG. 14 (c), the right portion of the front surface (the surface facing the front protruding portion 216) of the rear protruding portion 217 is the rear surface of the front protruding portion 216 (the surface facing the rear protruding portion 217). Is in contact with. On the other hand, the left portion of the front surface of the rear protruding portion 217 is an inclined surface gradually separated from the front protruding portion 216. That is, a tapered sandwiching portion 215 (gap) in which the left end is opened and the right end is closed between the left portion of the rear surface of the front protruding portion 216 and the left portion of the front surface of the rear protruding portion 217.
Is formed. Therefore, the thread member of the illegal ball can enter from the left end of the sandwiching portion 215.
Further, the tip surface 216a (left side surface) of the front protrusion 216 and the tip surface 2 of the rear protrusion 217
The 17a (left side surface) is formed as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the sandwiching portion 215 so as to guide the thread member of the illegal ball to the sandwiching portion 215.

The left portion of the front surface of the rear protruding portion 217 (that is, the inclined surface gradually distant from the front protruding portion 216) is the first inclined surface 217b and the second inclined surface 21 having a gentler inclination than the first inclined surface 217b.
It consists of 7c.
The first inclined surface 217b having a steeper inclination is provided on the left end (open end) side of the sandwiching portion 215. As a result, at the open end of the sandwiching portion 215, the front protruding portion 216 and the rear protruding portion 21
Since the distance from the ball 7 can be increased, the thread member of the illegal ball can easily enter the sandwiching portion 215.
The second inclined surface 217c having a gentler inclination is provided on the right end (closed end) side of the sandwiching portion 215. As a result, it is possible to take a long portion where the force for sandwiching the thread member of the illegal ball is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value, so that the thread member of the illegal ball can be effectively sandwiched and the operation of the thread member becomes difficult. Not only that, it is possible to make it difficult to collect the thread member.

In the sandwiching mechanism configured as described above, of the two illegal balls connected by the thread member, the illegal ball launched first flows down the third flow path 214c as a foul ball through the first flow path 214a. At that time, the thread member enters from the left end of the sandwiching portion 215. Then, the thread member that has entered the sandwiching portion 215 is pulled by the flow force of the illegal ball and is sandwiched between the sandwiching portions 215. Since the sandwiching portion 215 is arranged along the flow direction of the game ball, it is possible to sandwich the thread member of the illegal ball without hindering the flow of the game ball.

The first flow path 214a inserts the game ball that has flowed into the first foul ball inflow port 213a into the sandwiching portion 21.
After guiding to the left above 5, the third flow path 214c is configured to supply the game ball supplied below the sandwiching portion 215. It is configured to lead to the right below the portion 215. The sandwiching portion 215 is arranged so that the open end faces the left side. In this way, the open end of the sandwiching portion 215 is provided in the same direction as the flow direction of the game ball above the sandwiching portion 215, and in the direction opposite to the flow direction of the game ball below the sandwiching portion 215. By providing the thread member of the illegal ball, the thread member can be reliably sandwiched.

Both the first foul ball inflow port 213a into which the foul ball flows in and the ball outflow port 213d from which the foul ball is discharged are arranged on the right side of the open end of the sandwiching portion 215, and the sandwiching portion 215 Is a shape that tapers from the left side to the right side. Therefore, when one of the previously launched fraudulent balls flows in from the first foul ball inlet 213a and is discharged from the ball outlet 213d, the thread member of the fraudulent ball is abbreviated in the foul ball catch unit 210. It is in a bent state. As a result, the other illegal ball is launched into the game area 32 to pull the other end side of the thread member (the other illegal ball side), or the thread member is operated from the lower plate 23 to cause the thread member. By pulling one end side (one fraudulent ball side that has become a foul ball), the force that moves the part sandwiched between the thread member sandwiching portions 215 to the right side (closed end side) is the thread member. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably pinch the thread member of the illegal ball.

Specifically, for example, in the thread member, one of the previously launched illegal balls flows in from the first foul ball inflow port 213a and is discharged from the ball outflow port 213d, so that the open end of the sandwiching portion 215 It is sandwiched between the rear surface of the front protruding portion 216 and the first inclined surface 217b of the rear protruding portion 217. Next, the thread member is pulled on the other end side by the firing force when the other illegal ball is launched into the game area 32, so that the rear surface of the front side protrusion 216 and the first inclined surface of the rear side protrusion 217 are pulled. It moves from the position sandwiched between the front protruding portion 216 to the position sandwiched between the rear surface of the front protruding portion 216 and the second inclined surface 217c of the rear protruding portion 217, and is sandwiched by the sandwiching portion 215. After that, since one end side of the thread member is pulled by being operated from the lower plate 23, the front side protruding portion 2
It moves toward the closed end while being sandwiched between the rear surface of 16 and the second inclined surface 217c of the rear protruding portion 217. Therefore, as the operation from the lower plate 23 of the thread member is repeated, the thread member is gradually pinched by the sandwiching portion 215, and the thread member finally becomes immobile, which makes it difficult to operate the thread member. Not only that, it becomes difficult to collect the thread member. Therefore, since evidence of fraudulent activity may remain, it is possible to effectively avoid the second fraudulent activity.

It is also possible to provide an inclined surface on the rear surface of the front projecting portion 216 to form the sandwiching portion 215 without providing the inclined surface on the front surface of the rear projecting portion 217, or to form the sandwiching portion 215 with the rear surface of the front projecting portion 216. It is also possible to provide inclined surfaces on both front surfaces of the rear protruding portion 217 to form the sandwiching portion 215. However, when the thread member of the illegal ball is operated from the lower plate 23, the thread member is pressed against the rear surface of the front protruding portion 216. Therefore, if an inclined surface is provided on the rear surface of the front protruding portion 216, the thread member is provided by the inclined surface. May be guided in a direction away from the sandwiching portion 215. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the inclined surface 2 is not provided on the rear surface of the front protruding portion 216, and the inclined surface 2 is provided on the front surface of the rear protruding portion 217.
17b and 217c are provided to form the sandwiching portion 215.
Further, the surface of the foul ball catch unit 210 that comes into contact with the thread member of the illegal ball (for example, the left portion of the rear surface of the front protruding portion 216 and / or the left portion of the front surface of the rear protruding portion 217) may be provided with irregularities. .. As a result, the frictional resistance between the foul ball catch unit 210 and the thread member becomes large, and the thread member is easily caught, so that the second fraudulent act can be effectively avoided.

Further, the second fraudulent act using the game ball that has flowed into the first foul ball inflow port 213a can be avoided by the sandwiching portion 215 of the foul ball catch unit 210. On the other hand, the foul ball may flow into the second foul ball inflow port 213b, and the second fraudulent act using the game ball that has flowed into the second foul ball inflow port 213b cannot be avoided by the sandwiching portion 215.
Therefore, as a countermeasure against the second fraudulent act using the game ball flowing into the second foul ball inflow port 213b, for example, the rib 211d forming the second foul ball inflow port 213b (FIG. 13 (FIG. 13).
A notch may be provided at the upper end of a)).

Further, for example, ribs 211e, 211f, 211g forming the ball outlet 213d (FIG. 1).
Notches may be provided in the lower end portion of 3 (b)), the corner portion formed by the ribs 211e and the ribs 211g, the corner portion formed by the ribs 211f and the ribs 211g, and the like. As a result, the thread member of the fraudulent ball becomes more difficult to operate, so that it is possible to effectively avoid the second fraudulent act using the game ball that has flowed into the first foul ball inflow port 213a.
Further, by providing notches at the lower ends of the ribs 211e, 211f, 211g and the corners formed by these ribs, the second foul ball inflow port 213b can be provided without notches at the upper ends of the ribs 211d. It is possible to avoid the second fraudulent act using the inflowing game ball.
Further, by providing notches at the lower ends of the ribs 211e, 211f, 211g and the corners formed by these ribs, and by providing notches at the upper end of the ribs 211d, the material flows into the second foul ball inflow port 213b. It is possible to effectively avoid the second fraudulent act using the game ball.
Further, the second foul ball inflow port 213b may not be provided. That is, all the foul balls may be configured to flow into the first foul ball inflow port 213a.

<Plate unit>
FIG. 15A is an exploded perspective view of the upper plate unit 153, and FIG. 15B is a plan view of the upper plate unit 153.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, the upper plate unit 153 has a unit main body 2
60 and an effect button 25 mounted from above at the center of the unit main body 260 are provided. The upper plate unit 153 is installed at the lower part of the glass frame 15, and the gaming machine 10
It is configured as a protruding unit that protrudes forward.
For example, as shown in FIG. 15A, an opening 2 is located at the center of the upper surface of the unit main body 260.
60a is formed. The opening 260a is for allowing the effect button 25 to be inserted into the unit body 260, and the lower portion of the effect button 25 is arranged in the unit body 260 via the opening 260a.

The effect button 25 is detachably attached to and detachable from the unit body 260 via a shaft portion 25b projecting from the bottom surface of the effect button 25 and a support member 260b projecting from the bottom surface of the unit body 260. It will be provided. Each support member 260b of the unit main body portion 260 is formed at a position corresponding to each shaft portion 25b of the effect button 25, and the shaft portion 25b is internally formed.
It has a screw hole for a screw that connects the support member 260b and the support member 260b.
Further, the support member 260b is configured to be inclined toward the front side of the gaming machine 10. Therefore, the effect button 25 supported by the support member 260b is also tilted toward the front side of the gaming machine 10. As a result, the operation surface of the effect button 25 can be arranged toward the player sitting in front of the gaming machine 10, and the operability can be improved.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, a lending button (ball lending button) 27a, a return button (discharging button) 27b, and a balance indicator (balance display section) 27c are on the upper surface of the unit main body 260. , The upper plate operation lever 27d, the portable terminal holder 28, the volume adjusting button 27e, the cross key 29, and the like are provided.
The mobile terminal placing portion 28 is provided with a plurality of (three in the case of the present embodiment) groove portions 28a. Each groove 28a is arranged so that the extending direction has a different angle with respect to the left-right direction. Therefore, the player can place the mobile terminal in the mobile terminal placing portion 28 in a stable state by selecting the groove portion 28a according to the size of the mobile terminal.

FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the effect button 25.
For example, as shown in FIG. 16, the effect button 25 includes a button unit base 251, a button lower base 252, a reflector base 253, a reflector 254, an inner lower lens 255, an inner upper lens 256, and a button. It is configured to include a lens decoration 257, a button lens 258, and a button frame 259. Among these members, the button lens 258, the button lens decoration 257, and the button bottom base 252 sink when the effect button 25 is pressed.

A vibration motor 251a is attached to the central portion of the button unit base 251, and the entire effect button 25 vibrates when the vibration motor 251a operates. That is,
The vibration function that vibrates the effect button 25 is achieved by the vibration motor 251a. Further, the effect button switch 25a is attached to the button unit base 251.
The button lower base 252 is a member arranged on the upper surface side of the button unit base 251 and is projected downward from the bottomed tubular base main body portion 252a having an open upper surface and the bottom surface portion of the base main body portion 252a. It is configured to include a plurality of (four in the case of the present embodiment) urging members 252b. The urging member 252b is, for example, a spring, the tip of which is the button unit base 25.
In contact with 1, the base main body 252a is urged away from the button unit base 251 (upward).

When the effect button 25 is pressed, the base main body 252a moves in a direction that opposes the urging force of the urging member 252b. That is, since the base main body 252a moves in the direction (downward) approaching the button unit base 251 when the effect button 25 is pressed, the button unit base 251 alleviates the impact when it collides with the base main body 252a. Buffer member 25
1b is attached.
A shading plate 252c is attached to the bottom surface of the base main body 252a, and when the effect button 25 is pressed and the separation distance between the base main body 252a and the button unit base 251 becomes equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value, the shading plate 252c Is arranged between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the effect button switch 25a attached to the button unit base 251. The effect button switch 25a outputs a signal indicating that the effect button 25 has been pressed when the light from the light emitting unit to the light receiving unit is blocked by the light shielding plate 252c.

The reflector base 253 is a substantially annular member that inclines downward toward the central opening 253a, and is engaged with the button unit base 251 from above the button lower base 252. The upper surface of the reflector base 253 is subjected to diffuse reflection processing (concavo-convex processing) that reflects light in multiple directions.
The reflector 254 is an inverted conical trapezoidal member having an open upper surface and a lower surface, and is engaged with the upper inner lens 256 in the button while being arranged in the lower inner lens 255 in the button. The surface of the reflector 254 is subjected to a reflection process that reflects light.

Inside the base main body 252a of the button lower base 252, a plurality of (in the case of this embodiment, the case of this embodiment).
The LED board 252d on which the 9) LEDs are mounted is mounted. One of the LEDs mounted on the LED substrate 252d is arranged at a position within the lower surface opening 254a of the reflector 254, and the remaining LEDs are located at a position within the central opening 253a of the reflector base 253. It is arranged at a position surrounding the lower surface opening 254a of the reflector 254.
Of the LEDs mounted on the LED board 252d, the lower surface opening 254 of the reflector 254
A part of the light from the LED arranged at the position within a is directly incident on the upper lens 256 in the button, and the remaining light is reflected by the reflector 254 and is reflected on the upper lens 256 in the button. Incident.
Further, among the LEDs mounted on the LED substrate 252d, the light from the LEDs arranged at the positions surrounding the lower surface opening 254a of the reflector 254 is reflected by the reflector 254 and the upper surface of the reflector base 253 (diffuse reflection processing is applied). It is incident on the surface), is reflected on the upper surface, and is incident on the in-button lenses 255 and 256.

The lower lens 255 inside the button is a member capable of transmitting light, and is engaged with the reflector base 253 in a state of being disposed in the reflector base 253.
The inner upper lens 256 inside the button is a member capable of transmitting light, and the lower inner lens 255 inside the button.
Is engaged with.
The button lens decoration 257 is a member capable of transmitting light, and is sandwiched between the button bottom base 252 and the button lens 258. On the upper surface of the button lens decoration 257, characters (characters "PUSH" in the case of this embodiment) and patterns due to unevenness are provided.
The button lens 258 is a transparent member capable of transmitting light, and is engaged with the button lower base 252 from above the button lens decoration 257.
The button frame 259 is a member arranged around the button lens 258 and engages with the button unit base 251 from above the button lens 258.

As described above, the in-button lens 255, 256, the button lens decoration 257, and the button lens 258 are members capable of transmitting light. Therefore, the light from the LED substrate 252d (that is, the light incident on the in-button lenses 255 and 256) is the in-button lenses 255 and 25.
It is transmitted to the outside of the effect button 25 through the 6 and the button lens decoration 257 and the button lens 258.
Further, since the button lens 258 is a transparent member, characters and patterns due to the unevenness provided on the upper surface of the button lens decoration 257 can be visually recognized from the outside of the effect button 25 through the button lens 258.

FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the unit main body portion 260.
For example, as shown in FIG. 17, the unit main body 260 includes an upper plate base 261, a button fixing member 262 attached to the lower surface side of the upper plate base 261 and an upper plate attached to the front surface side of the upper plate base 261. The frame 263 and the operation panel 2 mounted on the upper surface side of the upper plate frame 263.
64, the button base 265 attached to the lower surface side of the upper plate frame 263, the light emitting decorative member 266a attached to the upper plate frame 263, and the light emitting light attached to the upper plate frame 263 corresponding to the light emitting decorative member 266a. It is configured to include a main body member 266b.

The upper plate base 261 is a member that forms the upper plate 21. In addition, the upper plate base 261 has
A mobile terminal holder 28 is formed, and a lower speaker 19b on the left side is attached.
The button fixing member 262 is a member for fixing the lending button 27a, the return button 27b, and the balance display 27c at a predetermined position on the operation panel 264.
The upper plate frame 263 is a member arranged along the front edge of the upper plate 21. Upright walls 263a that stand upward are provided at the left front end and the right front end of the upper plate frame 263, respectively. The upright wall 263a is provided with a plurality of (six in the case of the present embodiment) through holes 263a1.

The light emitting decorative member 266a is a member mounted on the front side of the upright wall 263a of the upper plate frame 263, and is for fixing the upper plate lens capable of transmitting light and the upper plate lens at a predetermined position on the upright wall 263a. It is configured with a lens frame of.
The light emitting main body member 266b is a member mounted on the rear surface side of the upright wall 263a of the upper plate frame 263, and includes an LED substrate and a cover for fixing the LED substrate at a predetermined position of the upright wall 263a. Will be done. The light emitting main body member 266b includes a plurality of (six in the case of the present embodiment) LEDs, and each LED corresponds to each through hole 263a1 of the upright wall 263a in a ratio of 1: 1. That is, the light from the LED of the light emitting main body member 266b is the LE.
It enters the upper plate lens of the light emitting decorative member 266a through the through hole 263a1 corresponding to D, passes through the upper plate lens, and is discharged to the outside of the unit main body 260.

The operation panel 264 is a member arranged around the effect button 25. Operation panel 26
A lending button 27a, a return button 27b, and a balance indicator 27c are mounted on the upper surface side of the right portion of 4, and a lending button 27a, a return button 27b, and a balance indicator 27c are mounted on the lower surface side of the right portion of the operation panel 264. Board (not shown) is mounted. In addition, the operation panel 264
A volume adjustment button 27e and a cross key 29 are mounted on the upper surface side of the left portion of the operation panel 264, and a board (not shown) relating to the volume adjustment button 27e and the cross key 29 is mounted on the lower surface side of the left portion of the operation panel 264. It is installed.
At least the upper surface of the operation panel 264 is capable of reflecting light. Specifically, for example, the surface of the operation panel 264 is a glossy surface. Therefore, since the light emitted from the effect button 25 can be reflected by the operation panel 264, the effect of the effect button 25 can be enhanced.
The button base 265 is a member arranged below the effect button 25, and the effect button 2
It is provided with a support member 260b that supports 5. An upper plate operating lever 27d and a reinforcing plate 265a for supporting the operating panel 264 are mounted on the upper surface side of the button base 265.

The upper plate unit 153 is provided with a water storage mechanism for storing the liquid when the effect button 25 is splashed with the liquid due to the spilling of the beverage possessed by the player.
As described above, the upper plate unit 153 is installed in the lower part of the glass frame 15 and is configured as a protruding unit projecting forward of the gaming machine 10. Therefore, if a player spills a beverage or the like possessed by the player, there is a high possibility that the upper plate unit 153 will be spilled. The upper plate unit 153 is provided with an effect button 25, and when the effect button 25 is splashed with liquid and the effect button 25 breaks down, the effect using the effect button 25 (the effect of causing the effect button 25 to emit light, the effect). There is a problem that the effect of vibrating the button 25, the effect of intervening the operation of the effect button 25 by the player, etc.) cannot be executed, and the interest of the game is lowered.
As a countermeasure against such a problem, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a water storage mechanism capable of guiding the liquid to a relatively safe place and storing it when the effect button 25 is splashed with the liquid. There is.

Here, the relatively safe place is a space in the upper plate unit 153 that is less likely to affect various electric parts in the upper plate unit 153 even if liquid is stored. The water storage mechanism of the present embodiment is a mechanism for storing liquid inside the precision plate unit 153. On the other hand, the upper plate unit 153
Inside, the vibration motor 251a in the effect button 25, the LED board 252d, the effect button switch 25a, the LED board of the light emitting main body member 266b, the board related to the volume adjustment button 27e and the cross key 29, these and the effect control device 300. Various electric parts such as a relay board 153a for relaying the above, a board for a lending button 27a, a return button 27b, and a balance indicator 27c are arranged. Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the spaces in the upper plate unit 153, the space that does not easily affect these electric parts even if the liquid is stored is used as the water storage unit of the water storage mechanism.
The relay board 153a is an electric component arranged inside the precision plate unit 153 that is connected to the effect control device 300 (vibration motor 251a, LED board 252d, effect button switch 25a, LED board of the light emitting main body member 266b, etc. It is connected to the volume adjusting button 27e and the board related to the cross key 29) via the connector 153a1. In this way, the wiring space can be reduced by putting together the devices connected to the effect control device 300. The relay board 153a is attached to the rear end portion of the button base 265, for example, as shown in FIG. That is, the relay board 153a is a water storage unit (front water storage unit 267a, 2).
67b (described later), left side water storage units 268a, 268b (described later), right side water storage units 269a, 269
It is attached to the rear side (upper plate base 261 side) of b (described later)).
The relay board 153a is not only connected to the effect control device 300, but is also connected to other than the effect control device 300 (rental button 27a, return button 27b, and balance indicator 2).
The substrate related to 7c, etc.) may also be connected. This makes it possible to further reduce the wiring space.

FIG. 18A is a front view (front view) of the effect button 25 with the button frame 259 removed, and FIG. 18B is a perspective view of the effect button 25 with the button frame 259 removed. FIG. 18C is a plan view (top view) of the effect button 25 in a state where the button frame 259 is removed.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 16 and 18 (a) to 18 (c), the button lower base 252 has a front guide recess 252e, a left guide recess 252f, and a right guide recess 252 g on the outer surface of the base main body 252a. ing. Further, the button lens 258 has a dome-shaped lens body 25.
It has a groove 258b along the outer circumference of 8a. Therefore, the liquid applied to the effect button 25 moves along the surface of the lens body portion 258a to the groove portion 258b.

The liquid in the groove 258b is introduced along the groove 258b with the guide recesses 252e, 252f, 2
Move to 52g. That is, the groove portion 258b guides the liquid to the recesses 252e and 252f.
It is a guide path that leads to 252 g. The effect button 25 is installed in a state of being tilted toward the front side of the gaming machine 10. Therefore, the groove portion 258b on the front side of the left guide recess 252f and the right guide recess 252g (in FIG. 18C, the groove portion 258b on the front side of the alternate long and short dash line).
) Is guided to the front guide recess 252e by the groove 258b. Further, the groove portion 258b located on the rear side of the left side guide recess 252f and the right side guide recess 252g (FIG. 18 (FIG. 18).
In c), the liquid in the groove 258b) located behind the alternate long and short dash line is guided to the left guide recess 252f or the right guide recess 252g by the groove 258b.

19 (a) is a front view of the upper plate unit 153, and FIG. 19 (b) is FIG. 19 (a).
19 (c) is an enlarged view of a main part in FIG. 19 (b).
For example, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 19 (b) and 19 (c), the upper plate frame 263 has a front guide step portion 263b at the front end portion. The liquid that has moved to the front guide recess 252e of the effect button 25 is guided to the front guide step portion 263b of the upper plate frame 263 by the front guide recess 252e. That is, the front guide recess 252e allows the liquid to be introduced to the front guide step portion 263.
It is a guide port that guides to b. Specifically, the liquid that has moved to the front guide recess 252e flows from the upper end of the front guide recess 252e to the front end of the front guide recess 252e (front guide recess 252).
It moves to the tip of the upper surface of the bottom of e) and falls from the front end to the front guide step portion 263b.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 18A to 18C, a plurality of (three in the case of the present embodiment) ribs 252e1 are provided in the front guide recess 252e. As shown in FIG. 19C, for example, the front surface of the rib 252e1 has an inclined surface so as to be substantially orthogonal to the horizontal plane in a state where the effect button 25 is normally installed (a state in which the effect button 25 is inclined toward the front side of the gaming machine 10). It has become. Therefore, the liquid that has moved to the front guide recess 252e can move from the upper end of the front guide recess 252e to the front end of the front guide recess 252e in the shortest distance along the front surface of the rib 252e1. The liquid can be smoothly guided to the guide step portion 263b.

The liquid that has moved to the front guide step portion 263b is a space formed between the upper plate frame 263 and the operation panel 264 by the front guide step portion 263b (first front water storage portion 267a).
), And accumulates in the first front water storage unit 267a. And the first front side water storage part 267
When the water storage amount of a reaches the upper limit, the liquid flows from the first front side water storage part 267a to the space formed between the upper plate frame 263 and the button base 265 (second front side water storage part 267b). It moves and accumulates in the second front water storage unit 267b.
That is, first, the liquid flows into the first front water storage unit 267a, and after the water storage amount of the first front water storage unit 267a reaches the upper limit, the liquid flows into the second front water storage unit 267b. Therefore, the first front water storage unit 267a can delay the inflow of the liquid into the second front water storage unit 267b (the flow of the liquid to the effect button 25 side).

For example, as shown in FIG. 19C, when the effect button 25 is normally installed,
The front end of the front guide recess 252e (the tip of the upper surface of the bottom of the front guide recess 252e) is located on the front side of the upper end of the front guide step portion 263b and on the rear side of the front end of the front guide step portion 263b. .. As a result, the liquid falling from the front end of the front guide recess 252e can be reliably flowed into the front guide step portion 263b. That is, since the liquid falling from the front end of the front guide recess 252e does not directly flow into the second front water storage portion 267b, the second
The inflow of the liquid into the front water storage unit 267b (the flow of the liquid to the effect button 25 side) can be reliably delayed.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 19C, in a state where the effect button 25 is normally installed, the bottom lower surface 252e2 of the front guide recess 252e is inclined upward to the proximal end side (rear side). As a result, the liquid in the front guide recess 252e can be reliably dropped from the front end of the front guide recess 252e. That is, since the liquid in the front guide recess 252e does not directly flow into the second front water storage section 267b through the bottom lower surface 252e2, the liquid flows into the second front water storage section 267b (to the effect button 25 side). The flow of liquid) can be reliably delayed.

20 (a) is a plan view of the upper plate unit 153, and FIG. 20 (b) is FIG. 20 (a).
BB is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB, and FIG. 20 (c) is an enlarged view of a main part in FIG. 20 (b). FIG. 21A shows the button base 26 in a state where the reinforcing plate 265a is attached.
FIG. 21B is a plan view of the button base 265 in a state where the reinforcing plate 265a is not attached.
The precision plate unit 153 has a space that does not easily affect various electric parts even if liquid is stored, that is, a space that is used as a water storage unit of the water storage mechanism. It is provided with water storage units 269a and 269b. The left water storage portions 268a and 268b and the right water storage portions 269a and 269b are provided in the button base 265.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 20 (c), among the spaces in the button base 265, the space located below the left reinforcing plate 265a is the first left water storage unit 268.
The space below the reinforcing plate 265a on the right side is the first right side water storage unit 269.
a. That is, the portions with lattice hatching in FIG. 21B are the first left water storage unit 268a and the first right side water storage unit 269a.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 20 (c), for example, in the space in the button base 265, the space adjacent to the first left water storage unit 268a and located on the right side of the first left water storage unit 268a. The space (the space located below the effect button 25) is the second left water storage unit 268b, the space adjacent to the first right water storage unit 269a, and the space located on the left side of the first right water storage unit 269a (the space located below the first right water storage unit 269a). The space located below the effect button 25) is the second right water storage unit 269b.
Is. That is, the portions with lattice hatching in FIG. 21A are the second left water storage section 268b and the second right water storage section 269b.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 20 (c), the operation panel 264 has a left guide step portion 264a and a right guide step portion 264b at the edge of the opening 260a. The liquid that has moved to the left side guide recess 252f of the effect button 25 is guided to the left side guide step portion 264a of the operation panel 264 by the left side guide recess 252f. That is, the left side guide recess 252f is a guide port for guiding the liquid to the left side guide step portion 264a. Further, the liquid that has moved to the right side guide recess 252 g of the effect button 25 is guided to the right side guide step portion 264b of the operation panel 264 by the right side guide recess 252 g. That is, the right side guide recess 252 g is a guide port for guiding the liquid to the right side guide step portion 264b.

The liquid that has moved to the left guide step portion 264a of the operation panel 264 is guided to the first left water storage section 268a by the left guide step section 264a and the left reinforcing plate 265a and accumulates in the first left water storage section 268a. .. Then, when the amount of water stored in the first left water storage unit 268a reaches the upper limit, the liquid moves from the first left water storage unit 268a to the second left water storage unit 268b and enters the second left water storage unit 268b. Accumulate.
That is, first, the liquid flows into the first left water storage unit 268a, and after the water storage amount of the first left water storage unit 268a reaches the upper limit, the liquid flows into the second left water storage unit 268b. Therefore, the first left water storage unit 268a can delay the inflow of the liquid into the second left water storage unit 268b (the flow of the liquid to the effect button 25 side).

Further, the liquid that has moved to the right guide step portion 264b of the operation panel 264 is guided to the first right water storage section 269a by the right guide step section 264b and the right reinforcing plate 265a, and is inside the first right water storage section 269a. Accumulate. Then, when the water storage amount of the first right side water storage unit 269a reaches the upper limit, the liquid is transferred from the first right side water storage unit 269a to the second right side water storage unit 269.
It moves to b and accumulates in the second right water storage unit 269b.
That is, first, the liquid flows into the first right-side water storage unit 269a, and after the water storage amount of the first right-side water storage unit 269a reaches the upper limit, the liquid flows into the second right-side water storage unit 269b. Therefore, the first right side water storage unit 269a can delay the inflow of the liquid into the second right side water storage unit 269b (the flow of the liquid to the effect button 25 side).
Further, since the button base 265 is tilted forward (see FIG. 19B), when the amount of water stored in the second left water storage unit 268b or the second right water storage unit 269b reaches the upper limit, the liquid is released. It moves from the second left side water storage unit 268b and the second right side water storage unit 269b to the second front side water storage unit 267b and accumulates in the second front side water storage unit 267b.

Water storage units of the water storage mechanism (front water storage units 267a, 267b, left water storage units 268a, 268b,
The liquid accumulated in the water storage sections 269a and 269b) on the right side evaporates naturally. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, since various electric parts are provided in the upper plate unit 153, the evaporation of the liquid in the water storage unit can be promoted by the heat from these parts.
A drainage port may be provided so that the liquid in the water storage unit can be discharged to the outside of the gaming machine 10. Since the lower plate 23 is arranged at the lower left of the upper plate unit 153, the drain port is the upper plate from the viewpoint of preventing the liquid discharged from the drain port from flowing into the lower plate 23. It is preferably provided on the right side of the unit 153. Further, the drainage port may be provided with an opening / closing member that opens and closes the drainage port according to an operation by a player or the like.

In the water storage mechanism configured as described above, the groove portion 258b provided in the button lens 258 of the effect button 25 and the guide recesses 252e and 2 provided in the button bottom base 252 of the effect button 25.
With 52f and 252g, the liquid applied to the effect button 25 does not enter the inside of the effect button 25 (the inside of the button unit base 251 to the button lens 258), and the liquid is placed in a relatively safe place in the upper plate unit 153. Can be induced. Therefore, even if the effect button 25 is splashed with liquid, the effect button 25 is unlikely to break down. Therefore, the effect using the effect button 25 (the effect of causing the effect button 25 to emit light, the effect of vibrating the effect button 25, and the effect button 25 by the player). It is possible to reduce the occurrence of inconvenience that makes it impossible to execute (such as the effect of intervening the operation of).

Further, a relatively safe place in the upper plate unit 153 is placed in the second water storage unit (second front water storage unit 2).
67b, 2nd left water storage unit 268b, 2nd right water storage unit 269b) and 1st water storage unit (1st front side water storage unit 267a, 1st left water storage unit) located farther from the effect button 25 than the 2nd water storage unit. 268a, the first right water storage unit 269a), the liquid induced in the precision plate unit 153 is first stored in the first water storage unit, and after the water storage amount of the first water storage unit reaches the upper limit, the second water storage unit Can be stored in the department. That is, the first water storage unit can delay the inflow (flow) of a predetermined amount of liquid (for example, the maximum water storage amount of the first water storage unit) into the second water storage unit. In this way, by delaying the inflow of the liquid into the second water storage unit (the flow of the liquid to the effect button 25 side) by the first water storage unit, the inconvenience that the effect using the effect button 25 cannot be executed occurs. It is possible to reduce it reliably.

For example, as shown in FIG. 19B, an effect button switch 25a is arranged above the second front water storage unit 267b. Therefore, when the amount of water stored in the second front water storage unit 267b reaches the upper limit, the effect button switch 25a may come into contact with the liquid and break down. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 20 (c), the second left water storage unit 268b and the second right water storage unit 26
A vibration motor 251a is arranged above 9b. Therefore, the second left water storage unit 2
When the amount of water stored in 68b or the second right water storage unit 269b reaches the upper limit, the vibration motor 251a may come into contact with the liquid and break down.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inflow of the liquid into the second water storage unit can be delayed by the first water storage unit. Therefore, during the delay, it is possible to take measures such as wiping off the liquid on the effect button 25 so that the amount of water stored in the second water storage unit does not reach the upper limit, so that the effect button switch 25a fails. It is possible to surely reduce the occurrence of inconveniences such as the effect that the player intervenes the operation of the effect button 25 cannot be executed, the effect that the vibration motor 251a breaks down and the effect that vibrates the effect button 25 cannot be executed, and the like. It becomes.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in a gaming machine provided with an operating means (upper plate unit 153) having an operating unit (effect button 25) that can be operated by the player, the operation of the operating unit can be performed. A predetermined effect (for example, a look-ahead effect described later) can be executed accordingly, and the operating means is
A substrate (for example, LED substrate 252d) provided inside the operation unit and a fluid (for example, liquid).
(Groove portion 258b, induction recesses 252e, 252f, 252g) and delay means for delaying the flow of the fluid induced by the induction means (first water storage portions 267a, 26).
8a, 269a) and (see FIGS. 19 and 20). Specifically, the guiding means guides the fluid to the delaying means, and the delaying means is on the inner side of the operation unit (that is, the second).
The flow of fluid to the water storage units 267b, 268b, 269b) is delayed.
Therefore, even if a fluid (for example, a liquid) is applied to the operation unit (effect button 25), the operation unit is less likely to break down, so that the inconvenience of not being able to perform the effect using the operation unit is unlikely to occur. , The interest is hard to decline.

22 (a) is a right side view of the front frame unit 15a, and is a view for explaining the viewing window portion 15c, and FIG. 22 (b) is an enlarged view of a main part in FIG. 22 (a). Is. FIG. 23 (
a) is a rear side perspective view of the front frame unit 15a, and is a view for explaining the viewing window portion 15c, and FIG. 23 (b) is an enlarged view of a main part in FIG. 23 (a). ..
For example, as shown in FIGS. 22A and 22B, when the glass frame 15 is opened with the front frame 12 closed, the viewing window portion 15c (between the front frame main body portion 151 and the upper plate unit 153). Gap)
The inside of the upper plate unit 153 can be visually recognized from the outside of the glass frame 15.
Since the viewing window portion 15c is provided on the open end (right end) side of the glass frame 15, the right side region inside the upper plate unit 153 is particularly easy to see through the viewing window portion 15c.

For example, as shown in FIG. 17, the upper plate operating lever 27d, which is operated to allow the game ball in the upper plate 21 to flow down to the lower plate 23, is provided on the right side of the button base 265. Therefore, the portion of the upper plate operating lever 27d that is disposed inside the upper plate unit 153 (hereinafter referred to as "base end portion of the upper plate operating lever 27d") is located in the right side region inside the upper plate unit 153. Since it is located, it can be visually recognized through the viewing window portion 15c, for example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b). That is, the operation of the upper plate operating lever 27d can be visually confirmed through the viewing window portion 15c.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 17, one of the two light emitting main body members 266b is attached to the upright wall 263a on the right side of the upper plate frame 263. Therefore, since the one light emitting main body member 266b (right light emitting main body member 266b) is located in the right side region inside the precision plate unit 153, for example, as shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b). , It can be visually recognized through the viewing window portion 15c. Further, when the light emitting main body member 266b on the right side emits light, the inside of the upper plate unit 153 (particularly, the right region inside the upper plate unit 153) is brightly illuminated by the light leaking from the light emitting main body member 266b. Therefore, it becomes easier to visually check the inside of the upper plate unit 153 (for example, visually confirm the operation of the upper plate operation lever 27d) via the visual recognition window portion 15c.
Further, when the light emitting main body member 266b on the right side is emitting light, the light emitting mode can be visually confirmed from the visual recognition window portion 15c, so that it is currently generated even if the glass frame 15 is not closed and confirmed. It is possible to recognize the error etc. Specifically, for example, when the light emitting mode corresponding to the door opening error is red and the light emitting mode corresponding to the payout error is green,
Whether the light emitting main body member 266b on the right side emits light in red (that is, only a door opening error occurs) or yellow (= red + green) (that is, a door opening error and payout). Since it is possible to confirm (whether an error has occurred) from the viewing window portion 15c, it is possible to recognize the currently occurring error without closing and confirming the glass frame 15.

FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the front frame unit 15a.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 6A, 6B and 24, the front frame unit 15a is attached to the front frame main body 151 and the upper left and upper right portions on the front side of the front frame main body 151, respectively. Speaker decoration 152, an upper plate unit 153 attached to the lower part on the front side of the front frame main body 151, and a front frame light emitting unit attached to each of the left and right parts on the front side of the front frame main body 151. 1
The cover member 155 is attached to each of the upper left portion and the upper right portion on the rear surface side of the front frame main body portion 151. The front frame light emitting unit 154 is a kind of frame decoration device 18.

FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the front frame light emitting unit 154 on the right side. FIG. 26 shows the LED substrate 181 and the reflector 183 and the inner lens 1 in the front frame light emitting unit 154 on the right side.
It is a figure explaining the relationship with 84. Since the configuration of the front frame light emitting unit 154 on the left side and the configuration of the front frame light emitting unit 154 on the right side are substantially the same, here, the front frame light emitting unit 154 on the right side is referred to with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. Explain, the front frame light emitting unit 154 on the left side
The description of is omitted.
For example, as shown in FIG. 25, the front frame light emitting unit 154 on the right side is arranged in front of the LED substrate 181 and the LED substrate 181 to be fastened to the front frame main body 151 and fastened to the front frame main body 151. Transparent back cover 182 and the back cover 182 arranged in front of the back cover 182.
The reflector 183 and the inner lens 184 fixed to the inner lens 184, the side cover 185 arranged to the right of the inner lens 184 and fixed to the inner lens 184, and the side cover 185 arranged to the left of the inner lens 184. It is configured with an outer lens 186 that is fastened to. The outer lens 186 includes a reflector 183 and an inner lens 18.
It is engaged with the reflector 183 with the 4 covered. Further, the inner lens 184 and the outer lens 186 are fixed at the same position on the side cover 185.

Of the plurality of LEDs provided on the LED substrate 181, some LEDs (LEDs in the area surrounded by the broken line in FIG. 25) are LEDs for the reflector 183, and the remaining LEDs are LEDs for the inner lens 184. ..
For example, as shown in FIG. 26, there are a plurality of reflectors 183 (11 in the case of this embodiment).
183a is provided, and each of the LEDs for the reflector 183 provided on the LED substrate 181 (8 LEDs in the case of this embodiment) is a part of the through holes 183a provided on the reflector 183. 1 for each of (8 through holes 183a in the case of this embodiment)
It corresponds with 1. Therefore, since the LED for the reflector 183 is exposed through the through hole 183a corresponding to the LED, a part of the light from the LED for the reflector 183 is directly incident on the outer lens 186.

The remaining light from the LED for the reflector 183 (light that does not directly enter the outer lens 186) is the front surface of the reflector 183 (a surface that has been subjected to a reflection process that reflects light).
Is reflected and incident on the outer lens 186.
Since the outer lens 186 is a transparent member, the light from the LED for the reflector 183 incident on the outer lens 186 is transmitted to the outside of the front frame light emitting unit 154 through the outer lens 186. Thus, by the reflector 183, the reflector 18
Since the direct light from the LED for 3 and the indirect light (reflected light) from the reflector 183 can be irradiated toward the player side, a more effective light emission effect can be performed.
Further, since the LED for the reflector 183 is exposed through the through hole 183a of the reflector 183, it can be visually recognized from the outside of the front frame light emitting unit 154 through the transparent outer lens 186.

On the other hand, the LED for the inner lens 184 provided on the LED substrate 181 is covered with an inner lens 184 (member shown by a broken line in FIG. 26) capable of transmitting light. Therefore, the light from the LED for the inner lens 184 passes through the inner lens 184 and enters the outer lens 186, passes through the outer lens 186, and is emitted to the outside of the front frame light emitting unit 154.
Further, the inner lens 184 is a semi-transparent member capable of transmitting light but having low transparency. Therefore, since it is blocked by the inner lens 184, the LED for the inner lens 184 cannot be visually recognized from the outside of the front frame light emitting unit 154 through the transparent outer lens 186.

For example, as shown in FIG. 25, the side cover 185 is provided with a plurality of (five in the case of the present embodiment) openings, and each of these openings is covered with a translucent inner cover 185a. Therefore, the light transmitted through the inner lens 184 (inner lens 184)
Light from the LED) also enters the inner cover 185a, and the inner cover 185a
Is transmitted to the outside of the front frame light emitting unit 154. The inner cover 185a is
It is a translucent member that can transmit light but has low transparency. Therefore, the inner cover 1
The inside of the front frame light emitting unit 154 cannot be visually recognized through 85a.

<Sphere flow path unit>
FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame 11 as viewed from the rear surface side.
For example, as shown in FIG. 27, on the rear surface side of the outer frame 11, a launching board 240a for controlling the ball launching device 240, a ball flow path unit 220, a payout board (payout control device 200 (see FIG. 31)), and a payout board (see FIG. 31). A board unit 11a having a power supply board (power supply device 400 (see FIG. 31)) is arranged.

FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the spherical flow path unit 220.
For example, as shown in FIG. 28, the ball flow path unit 220 includes a ball flow path unit base 221, a front lid member 222 mounted on the front surface side of the ball flow path unit base 221 and a rear surface of the ball flow path unit base 221. It is configured to include a rear lid member 223 mounted on the side. On the front side of the ball flow path unit base 221, an out ball detection switch 32a (see FIG. 31) that detects all game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game is attached. ing.

FIG. 29 (a) is a rear view (rear view) of the ball flow path unit base 221 and is a view of FIG. 29 (b).
) Is a front view (front view) of the front lid member 222, and is a view when the front lid member 222 is made transparent.
The game ball paid out from the payout unit flows into the ball flow path unit 220 from the inflow port 221e (see FIG. 28) provided on the rear surface side of the ball flow path unit base 221 and passes through the ball flow path unit base 221. It is discharged to the outside of the ball flow path unit 220 from the outflow port 221c (see FIG. 28) penetrating in the front-rear direction. The discharged game ball is supplied to the upper plate 21.
On the other hand, when the upper plate 21 is full, the game ball flowing into the ball flow path unit 220 from the inflow port 221e is a payout ball flow provided between the ball flow path unit base 221 and the rear lid member 223. It flows down the path and is discharged to the outside of the ball flow path unit 220. The discharged game ball is supplied to the lower plate 23. For example, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), the ball flow path unit base 221
A payout ball flow path forming rib 221a that forms the payout ball flow path is projected on the rear surface.
An overflow sensor 221b for detecting that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored (full) in the lower plate 23 is arranged in the downstream portion of the payout ball flow path. The overflow sensor 221b is, for example, a pressure sensor that detects the pressure from the game ball, and is attached to the rear surface side of the ball flow path unit base 221 as shown in FIG. 29 (a), for example.
The arrow in FIG. 29A indicates the flow direction of the game ball paid out from the payout unit.
That is, it is an arrow indicating the guiding direction of the game ball by the payout ball flow path).

All the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been launched into the game area 32 and finished the game are ball flow path units from the ball flow path unit 221d (see FIG. 28) provided on the front side of the ball flow path unit base 221. It flows into the ball flow path 220, flows down the out ball flow path provided between the ball flow path unit base 221 and the front lid member 222, and is discharged to the outside of the ball flow path unit 220. The discharged game ball is discharged from the game machine 10 to the island equipment side. For example, as shown in FIG. 29B, the out sphere flow path forming rib 222 forming the out sphere flow path is formed on the rear surface of the front lid member 222.
a is projected.
An out-ball detection switch 32a is arranged in the middle of the out-ball flow path, and the out-ball detection switch 32a is configured to detect one game ball passing through the out-ball flow path. .. The arrow in FIG. 29B indicates the flow direction of all the game balls (safe ball and out ball) that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game (that is, the direction in which the game ball is guided by the out ball flow path). It is an arrow indicating.

The out ball detection switch 32a is not a sensor that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game, but the out balls 30a (out ports 30a provided in the game area 32). It may be a sensor that detects a game ball) that has flowed into (see FIG. 30). That is, the safe ball (the game ball that has won the winning area) may not flow into the ball receiving port 221d of the ball flow path unit 220, and only the out ball may flow into the ball receiving port 221d.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 30, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 80 that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front surface of the game board main body 80 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and an outer peripheral wall (guide rail) 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30. The game area 32 is provided. The gaming machine 10 is configured to launch a gaming ball from the hitting ball launching device 240 into the gaming area 32 surrounded by the outer peripheral wall 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is arranged in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variablely displaying a plurality of identification information is arranged.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). Still images and moving images can be displayed as effect images in the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed. Information about the game such as a background image that enhances the effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variablely displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball that has passed through the warp flow path roll. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the start winning opening 36, the game ball rolled on the stage portion 620 can easily win the starting winning opening 36.
Further, on the upper part of the center case 40, a board effecting device 44 that produces a game by operating is provided. The board effect device 44 has a display device 41 from the state shown in FIG.
It is possible to operate toward the center of.

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 31) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided.
When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 31) provided in the general winning opening 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 31).

On the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) is provided. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 31).
The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member (not shown), and the movable member always holds a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a predetermined result, the game ball is easily flowed into the normal fluctuation winning device 37 by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 31) as a driving device (game). It is designed to be changed to a state that is advantageous to the person.

In the present embodiment, the movable member of the ordinary variable winning device 37 is the normal electric solenoid 37.
It is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory that opens and closes by advancing and retreating (sliding) in the front-rear direction by c, but the movable member of the ordinary variable winning device 37 is not limited to this. Ordinary variable winning device 3
The movable member of No. 7 may be, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that is opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side by the normal electric solenoid 37c, or a reverse "c" by the normal electric solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens in the shape of "".
Further, the normal variable winning device 37 enables the winning of the game ball even when the movable member is closed, and the game ball may be less likely to be won in the closed state than in the open state.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, the game ball is not accepted or easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game between the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal variation winning device 37. A convertible first special variable winning device (upper large winning opening) 38 is provided. In the first special variable winning device 38, the opening / closing member (not shown) moves forward and backward (slides).
By doing so, the upper prize opening is converted into a state in which a game ball can flow in. 1st special variable winning device 3
In No. 8, the player is given a predetermined value by converting the upper prize opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variation display game and facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the upper prize opening. The game value (prize ball) is given. The game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 31).

Inside the upper prize opening (winning area), a specific area where game balls can flow in is provided, and a lever solenoid 38f is provided so as to change the inflow probability of the game balls into the specific area.
A lever member that operates according to (see FIG. 31) is provided. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 31) capable of detecting the inflow of a game ball is provided in the specific area, and based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d, a state advantageous for the player can be obtained. It occurs (in the present embodiment, a high probability state occurs after the end of the special gaming state).
The game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38.

Further, inside the upper prize opening, a residual ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 31) for detecting a game ball discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 without flowing into a specific area is provided. ing. The number of game balls (the number of game balls that have flowed into the upper prize opening) detected by the large prize switch 38a provided inside the upper prize opening, the specific area switch 38d, and the remaining ball discharge port switch 3
By matching the number of game balls detected in 8e (the number of game balls discharged from the upper prize opening), it can be confirmed that all the game balls in the upper prize opening are discharged, and basically this confirmation. Until the end of the event, the new top prize opening will not be opened.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, on the right side of the start winning opening 36, a second special variable winning can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A device (lower prize opening) 39 is provided. 2nd special variable winning device 3
In No. 9, the opening / closing member (not shown) moves back and forth (slides) in the front-rear direction to convert the lower prize opening into a state in which the game ball can flow in. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the lower prize opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the lower prize opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 31).

The game area 32 below the starting winning opening 36 is provided with an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won in the winning opening or the like. Further, the game board main body 80 is outside the game area 32.
In the lower right corner of, the special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game)
And a batch display device 50 for executing a normal map variation display game is provided.

The batch display device 50 is a special figure 1 composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like.
Consists of a special figure 1 display (1st special figure fluctuation display unit) 51 for a variable display game, a special figure 2 display (2nd special figure variable display unit) 52 for a special figure 2 variable display game, and an LED lamp. The first storage display unit 53 for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 1 variable display game and the second storage display unit 54 for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 2 variable display game composed of LED lamps are displayed. Be prepared.

Further, the batch display device 50 has a round display unit 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39), and is advantageous to the player among left-handed (normal) and right-handed. A first game state display unit 56 for notifying the hitting method (striking method corresponding to the game state) and a probability display unit 57 for notifying the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure variation display game are provided. There is. The batch display device 50 has a probability state display unit that displays that the probability state of the jackpot is in the high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and a display that lights up when a jackpot occurs to notify the occurrence of the jackpot. A unit (display) or the like may be provided.
Further, a normal map display unit 58 for displaying the normal map fluctuation display game, a storage display unit 59 for notifying the start memory number of the normal map fluctuation display game, and a time saving state that lights up when a time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state. A notification unit 60 and the like are provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is centered, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. Flashes the segment to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 msec. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also blinked and driven. It is displayed that it is changing, and special figure 1
It is configured so that it can be distinguished from the special figure 2. Then, when the result of the game is "off", for example, the central segment (in the case of special figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side in addition) is turned on as the result mode of the off, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", the result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result mode of the hit is turned on and the game result is displayed.

The first storage display unit 53 turns off a plurality of LEDs for the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) among the number of winning balls to the starting winning opening 36, which is a variable start condition of the special figure 1 display 51. ,lighting blinking)
Display by.
The second storage display unit 54 is a normal fluctuation winning device 37 which is a fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52.
Of the number of winning balls, the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) is set by turning off and turning on multiple LEDs (
(Blinking) to display.
The round display unit 55 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and turns off all the LEDs when not in the special game state, and turns on the LEDs corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. Turn on. The round display unit 55 may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

The first game state display unit 56 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, in the case of a game state in which left-handed hitting is more advantageous to the player than right-handed hitting (normal hitting), all the LEDs are turned off and left. When right-handed is more advantageous to the player than right-handed (when right-handed), all LEDs are turned on.
The probability display unit 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and for example, the probability state of a big hit is a low probability state (
In the case of the normal probability state), all the LEDs are turned off, and when the jackpot probability state is the high probability state (probability change state), all the LEDs are turned on.

FIG. 31 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 is a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
It includes a U) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates an operating clock of a CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 include DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A predetermined level of DC voltage such as V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply 400 is an AC-DC that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a converter, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a DC32V voltage, and a game microcomputer 1
A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 11 in the event of a power failure,
It has a power failure monitoring circuit, and includes a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the occurrence and recovery of a power failure in the game control device 100.

In this embodiment, the power supply unit 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main unit. It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the target of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 (
In particular, the data supplied to the built-in RAM) and stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or power failure. That is, the game control device 100 can store and retain information about the game even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and after the power failure is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It serves as a means for retaining the memory of game information.
The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal, and also resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process of forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
It includes M (random access memory) 111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C stores the work area of the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. It is used as. ROM111B or RAM11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. When the special result mode is adopted, the gaming state is advantageous for the player (special gaming state).
At the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed in the gaming machine 10
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). State that became identification information,
However, the special result mode may be set to the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and premier reach are set. The expected value is no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <
It is getting higher in the order of premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the game microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (
Random generation to generate variation pattern random numbers for determining various reach and variation display game execution time in non-reach variation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the general clock variation display game. It is provided with a circuit and a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of a random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

Further, the CPU 111A is the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game.
Acquire any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit, small hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state. One of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables based on the number of start storages and the like. Here, CPU111A
Is a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, and a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37. The winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, the large winning opening switch 38a in the first special variable winning device 38, the large winning opening switch 39a in the second special variable winning device 39, and the gate switch in the general drawing start gate 34. 34a, the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e arranged in the first special variable winning device 38, and all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game. An interface chip that is connected to the out-ball detection switch 32a to detect, inputs a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches, and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. (Proximity I / F) 121 is provided. Since the input range of the proximity I / F121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floats. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126, and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switches 38a, 39a, and the gate switch 3
The detection signal of 4a is input to the second input port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the specific area switch 38d, the remaining ball discharge switch 38e, and the out ball detection switch 3
The detection signal of 2a is input to the fourth input port 126. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of the magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10, a detection signal of the vibration sensor 65 for detecting the vibration of the gaming machine 10,
The detection signal of the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are also input. It has become so.

Further, a signal from the setting key switch 152 for detecting the operation of the setting key operation unit is input to the third input port 124. The setting key operation unit is equipped with a keyhole for inserting the setting key.
It is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is in the state of not being turned to the second position. In some cases, it turns off.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit are operation units for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values that give special results in the special figure variation display game are assigned, and operate these operation units. As a result, it is possible to select a probability setting value to which a probability value that gives a special result is assigned in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is used in the game. There is. Here, six probability setting values, "setting 1" to "setting 6", are prepared.

When selecting the probability setting value, R with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position.
By turning on the power of the gaming machine while operating (pressing) the AM initialization switch 112, the probability setting value can be changed to the probability setting value change mode, and the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated during the probability setting value change mode ( The probability setting value can be changed by pressing). The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays the probability set value information while the operation related to the probability set value is being performed (during the probability set value change mode and the probability set value confirmation mode), and other than that. In, the calculated base value and the accessory ratio are displayed.

Further, a state in which the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position (RAM initialization switch 11).
By turning on the power of the gaming machine (2 is not operated), the currently selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153, but the probability setting value cannot be changed. The probability setting value confirmation mode is set. The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and displays the probability set value as a number from 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode that can recognize the probability set value may be used. In addition, other types of display devices such as liquid crystal display devices may be used.
The probability setting value may be indicated by the lighting mode of one or a plurality of LEDs, the emission color, and the like.

Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out ball detection switch 32a) are the main board 100.
Is also supplied to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37
The detection signal of a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is an enable signal CE by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 indicates whether or not the command can be accepted), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for input of a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided which takes in (based on a signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122, and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, so that the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 is turned off in order to output to the test firing test apparatus. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is used for each port 122, 123, of the input unit 120.
It is not supplied to 124 and 126. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent system malfunction, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61, the panel radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 65, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, a game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test device via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the machine cannot control the game. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not go through the buffer, and the like. There is. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140. The second output port 134 is a first large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b for opening the first special variable winning device 38, and a second large winning opening solenoid (large) for opening the second special variable winning device 39. Winning port solenoid 2) 39b, 1st special variable winning device 38
The operation data of the lever solenoid 38f that operates the lever member inside and the normal electric solenoid 37c that opens the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is output, and the display data of the performance display device 153 that displays the currently selected probability setting value is displayed. This is a port for output.
Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. On / on the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected
A fourth output port 136 for outputting off-data is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information on the external information terminal board 7.
A fifth output port 137 for outputting to 1 is provided. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, amusement hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the operation data signals of the large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the lever solenoid 38f, and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. It is output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the driver (drive circuit) 138a and the third output port 135. The external information signal supplied from the third driver 138c and the fifth output port 137 that output the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50 to the external device such as the management device is sent to the external information terminal board 71. A fourth driver 138d to output and a fifth driver 138e to generate and output a drive signal by receiving the display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134 are provided. Data is transmitted from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e by serial communication.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. The fifth driver 138e has a D as a power supply voltage so that the performance display device 153 operating at 5 V can be driven.
C5V is supplied from the power supply device 400.
Further, the second driver 138b for driving the segment line of the batch display device 50 is equipped with DC1.
2V is supplied. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 2 and the LEDs are turned on.
The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied.
The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. Photocoupler 13
Reference numeral 9 denotes a game microcomputer 111, which is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that data can be transmitted and received by serial communication with the inspection device 500. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, 124, 126 are provided. do not have.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36,
The start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switches 38a, 39a, and the gate switch 34a in the ordinary variable winning device 37 are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 and the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like are microswitches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 32.
The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
), And VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , Sound source LSI314 that controls the sound output to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.
It has.

The main control microcomputer 311 is a P that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
Program ROM 321 consisting of ROM (programmable read-only memory), RAM 322 that provides a work area, Fe that can retain stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure.
A RAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, and V.
It executes processing such as instructing the content of the output video to the DP 312, instructing the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lighting the decorative lamp, controlling the drive of the motor and the solenoid, and managing the production time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30 from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311.
C, the synchronization signal STS that gives the data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
Waits to notify the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, the interrupt signal INT from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
Is to be entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331, such as a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
Operates at DC 5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V. Therefore, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). Frame decoration LED control circuit 333, game board 3 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an provided LED (light emitting diode).
Board effect device 44 (for example, display device 41) provided at 0 (including the center case 40)
A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control a movable accessory (such as a movable accessory) that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display in the above. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a cross key 29 provided on the glass frame 15, and an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44. Production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) that detects
The function of detecting the on / off state of the main control microcomputer 311 and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 are detected and the detection signal is sent to the main control microcomputer 311. A switch input circuit 336 having a function of inputting is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the above configuration.
DC32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor or LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by the motor or the like. DC5 which is the power supply voltage of command I / F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, LED, and speaker. Furthermore, 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311
When using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as, DC 3.3V based on DC 5V
And a DC-DC converter for generating DC1.2V is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPSET signal) and sound source LSI314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, The amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332-334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control the lamp, the motor, and the like are supplied to reset the state. Further, the effect control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven when the N45 is connected and the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

FIG. 33 shows the jackpot probability, the fall probability, the small hit probability, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. The big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device (first special result).
The small hit is a special result (second special result) that does not involve the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38 and 39 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

The value (probability value) of the jackpot probability, which is the probability of becoming a jackpot (first special result), is special figure 1 and special figure 2.
The probability value in the low probability state and the probability value in the high probability state are the probability values as shown in FIG. 33A, respectively.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33A, the same probability value is assigned as the probability value in the high probability state to all of "setting 1" to "setting 6", but different probabilities. A value may be assigned. That is, the probability value in the high probability state may be switchable in multiple stages.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33A, the same probability value is assigned to "setting 1" and "setting 2" as the probability value in the low probability state, but different probability values are assigned. It may be assigned. The same applies to "setting 3" and "setting 4", and "setting 5" and "setting 6". That is, the probability value in the low probability state is not limited as long as it can be switched in multiple stages. Further, the same probability value may be assigned to all of "setting 1" to "setting 6" as the probability value in the low probability state. That is, the probability value in the low probability state may not be switchable in multiple stages.

Further, the effect distribution and the like may be different between "setting 1" and "setting 2" having the same probability value in the assigned low probability state. The same applies to "setting 3" and "setting 4", and "setting 5" and "setting 6".
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33A, there are six probability setting values (“setting 1”) for three types of probability values (probability value in the low probability state and probability value in the high probability state). "~" Setting 6 ")
Is assigned, but for example, three probability setting values (for example, "setting 1") are assigned to three types of probability values.
"To" Setting 3 ") is assigned and the remaining three probability setting values (for example," Setting 4 "to" Setting 6 ")
May be unused.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in the special gaming state based on the big hit (first special gaming state), the gaming ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operating area) of the first special variable winning device 38 and is detected by the specific area switch 38d. By being played (passing V), the high probability state is set after the end of the special gaming state, and the low probability state is set when the fall lottery performed every time the special figure variation display game is executed is won. The probability of winning the fall lottery is as shown in FIG. 33 (b).
Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is as shown in FIG. 33 (c). This small hit probability is higher in Special Figure 2 than in Special Figure 1. In addition, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state and the big hit probability. In the big hit and small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit will not be won in duplicate. In the present embodiment, the small hit is not provided in the special figure 1 but is provided only in the special figure 2, that is, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0, but the small hit is not limited to this, and for example, the small hit. May be provided in both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. Further, when the small hit is provided in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the small hit probability may be the same in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 2 is better than the special figure 1. May be higher, and special figure 1 may be higher than special figure 2.

Further, FIG. 33 (d) shows the jackpot types that can be selected in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, and the distribution probabilities of each jackpot type.
Special figure 1 The types of jackpots (first special result) in the variable display game are 10R probability variation jackpot and 4
There are three types: R probability variation jackpot and 10R normal jackpot. Similarly, there are three types of jackpots (first special result) in the special figure 2 variable display game: 10R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 10R normal jackpot. These jackpot types are selected based on the jackpot symbol random numbers. The number of each jackpot type indicates the actual number of rounds, and the probability change indicates that the game ball is likely to flow into a specific area (probability change operation area) and is likely to become a high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the special game state. , It is shown that the possibility that the game ball flows into the specific area (probability change operation area) is low and it is difficult to reach the high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the special game state.
Here, the actual number of rounds is the number of rounds for which opening control is performed so that a winning ball is actually generated by opening the special variable winning devices 38 and 39. The number of each jackpot type is the number of rounds at the time of jackpot (the number of actual rounds + the number of rounds in which the opening time of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is short and the opening control is performed so that the winning ball does not actually occur). You may.

Further, a first special result may be provided in which the possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific area is lower than that of the probabilistic jackpot, but the possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific area is higher than that of the normal jackpot.
Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game ball is in the high probability state depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the specific region (probability variation operation region). If the game ball does not flow into the area, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the jackpot type is normal, if the game ball flows into the specific area, the high probability state occurs.

FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c) show the opening mode in each round for each jackpot type.
The details of the opening mode are shown in FIG. 35.
As shown in FIG. 34 (a), in the 10R probability variation jackpot, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened and the specific area (probability variation operation area) is opened in the first round, and a long opening with V is performed. The long opening with V is an opening mode in which the game ball is likely to flow into a specific region (probability variation operating region). Then, from the second round onward, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened, and a long opening without V is performed.
As shown in FIG. 34 (b), in the 4R probability variation jackpot, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened and the specific area (probability variation operation area) is opened in the first round, and a long opening with V is performed.
Then, from the 2nd round to the 4th round, the 1st special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened. A long opening without V is performed, and after the 5th round, the 1st special variable winning device 38 is opened. A specific area is not opened. Short opening without V is performed. The short opening without V is an opening mode in which the possibility that the game ball will flow into the winning opening is lower than the long opening without V. That is, the long opening without V is an opening mode in which a winning ball is actually generated, and the short opening without V is an opening mode in which the opening time is short and no winning ball is actually generated.

As shown in FIG. 34 (c), in the 10R normal jackpot, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened and the specific area (probability variation operation area) is opened in the first round, and a short opening with V is performed. The short opening with V is an opening mode in which the game ball may flow into a specific region (probability variation operating region) and is lower than the long opening with V. Then, from the second round onward, a long opening without V is performed to open the first special variable winning device 38.
It is the first round that the game ball can flow into the specific area (probability change operation area).
Yes Long open and V Yes Short open only. That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the specific round, which is the round in which the gaming ball may flow into the specific area, is the first round. The specific round is not limited to the first round and can be changed as appropriate. also,
The specific round may be multiple times, such as the first round and the fifth round.

As shown in FIG. 35 (a), in the long opening without V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t11), and the openable time of 25,000 msec elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces). When any of the conditions for winning the game ball of) is satisfied, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed to end the round (t12). After that, the upper prize opening remaining ball processing time is started (t12), the interval time is started when the upper prize winning opening remaining ball processing time ends (t13), and the next round is started when the interval time ends (t14). ). note that,
In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 35 (b), in the long opening with V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t31). Furthermore, with the start of the round, the lever solenoid 3
The 8f is set to the ON state, and the specific area switch 38d is enabled. When the lever solenoid 38f is OFF, the lever member covers a specific area and the game ball cannot flow in. When the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member retracts from the specific area and the game ball can flow in. It becomes. Further, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is effective is a state in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d is treated as effective. On the other hand, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which even if the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 38d, it is treated as invalid.

The lever solenoid 38f is turned off when 64 msec has elapsed from the start of the round (t32). Then, 100 msec after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t33). That is, the game ball that has won a prize immediately after the first special variable prize device 38 is opened may flow into a specific area.

The first special variable winning device 38 is closed 200 msec after the start of the round (t).
34). Then, after 2700 msec, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened again (
t35), when either the openable time of 25,000 msec elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends. (T39). After that, the upper prize opening remaining ball processing time is started (t39), the interval time is started when the upper prize winning opening remaining ball processing time ends (t41), and the next round is started when the interval time ends (t42). .. In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

Further, after the second opening (t35) of the first special variable winning device 38, the lever solenoid 3
8f is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). In addition, the specific area switch 38d is also effective (t36). The second opening of the first special variable winning device 38 is for a sufficiently long time, and the lever solenoid 38f remains ON for a long time, so that the game ball will almost certainly flow into the specific area. Become. Therefore, when the jackpot type is probabilistic, it will almost certainly be in a high probability state.

Further, the lever solenoid 38f can be turned on for a predetermined time even after the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and flows into the first special variable winning device 38 just before closing. It is possible for the game balls that have been played to flow into a specific area. The first special variable winning device 38 is due to the passage of the openable time or the winning of a predetermined number of game balls.
Is closed, and when all the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are discharged within the remaining ball processing time of the upper prize opening, the lever solenoid 38f is accompanied by the end of the remaining ball processing time (t41). Is turned off to end the operation, and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid.

In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the passage of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 have the remaining ball processing time of the upper prize opening. If all of the lever solenoid 38f is discharged by the end of the period (t43) when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state, the lever solenoid 38f is turned into the OFF state and operates when the discharge is completed. Is terminated, and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid.
In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the passage of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 have the remaining ball processing time of the upper prize opening. If not all of the lever solenoid 38f is discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43), the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43) The lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation is terminated. In this case, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t44) 100 msec after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t43).

As shown in FIG. 35 (c), in the short opening with V, the same opening as the first opening of the first special variable winning device 38 in the long opening with V is performed (t51 to t54), and the opening is completed. The round ends based on (t54). Since the first special variable winning device 38 is opened for a very short time and the lever solenoid 38f is also turned on for a short time, it is unlikely that the game ball will flow into the specific region. Therefore, it is rare that a high probability state occurs when the jackpot type is normal.

The operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the switching of the specific area switch 38d between valid and invalid are performed in the same manner as in the case of long opening with V as long as the game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38 ( t55-t63). Therefore, if the game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38 even after the processing time of the remaining ball in the upper prize opening has elapsed, the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state when the discharge of the remaining ball is completed. The operation is terminated, and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid. If all the game balls are not discharged by the end of the period (t62) when the lever solenoid 38f is turned on, the lever solenoid 3
At the end of the period in which 8f is in the ON state (t62), the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state and the operation is terminated, and after the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state (t62).
After 100 msec, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t63).

Further, the first opening (t31 to t34) of the first special variable winning device 38 in the long opening with V shown in FIG. 35 (b) and the first opening in the short opening with V shown in FIG. 35 (c).
The opening of the special variable winning device 38 (t51 to t54) is set to an opening time such that at least one game ball can be won by the first special variable winning device 38.

As shown in FIG. 35 (d), in the short opening without V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened (t71) with the start of the round, and the openable time of 200 msec elapses or a predetermined number (
For example, if any of the conditions for winning 9 game balls is satisfied, the first special variable winning device 3
8 is closed to end the round (t72). However, since the openable time is short, it is rare that a predetermined number of prizes, which are the closing conditions, occur, and in most cases, the prize is closed as the openable time elapses. After that, the upper prize opening remaining ball processing time is started (t72), the interval time is started when the upper prize winning opening remaining ball processing time ends (t73), and the next round is started when the interval time ends (t74). ). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

Further, FIG. 34 (d) shows an opening mode in the second special gaming state (special gaming state based on small hits). In the second special game state, first, the small hit fanfare time is started, and when the small hit fanfare time ends, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, 16
The second special variable winning device 39 is closed when either the openable time of 00 msec elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls are won. After that, the small hit remaining ball processing time is started, and when the small hit remaining ball processing time ends, the small hit ending time starts, and when the small hit ending time ends, the second special gaming state ends. There may be a plurality of types of opening / closing modes (opening time and number of opening times) in the second special game state, and in that case, for example, it is determined which opening / closing mode is set (adopted) based on the small hit symbol. ..

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 36 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in the present embodiment.
It is a figure exemplifying.
The game state includes the normal game state ST1, the first specific game state ST2, and the second specific game state ST.
There are three. In addition to this, as special game states, there are a first special game state based on the first special result (big hit) and a second special game state based on the second special result (small hit), but they are omitted here. In each game state, the special figure probability from which the first special result to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, the effect mode controlled by the effect control device 300 to determine the effect mode of the game, and the main in the game state. The main starting area, which is the starting area to be aimed at, the main variable special map, which is the type of special figure variation display game to be mainly executed, and the launch direction of the game ball are defined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim for a prize in the starting winning opening 36 by hitting the left side, and aiming for a prize in the ordinary variable winning device 37 by hitting the right side. That is, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will. Further, each game state is designed on the assumption that one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly played, and the player plays the game according to this design. It is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to proceed mainly with the special figure variation display game, which is determined to be the main in the design so as to proceed. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each game state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

In the normal game state ST1, the special figure probability is low, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure variable display game or normal Figure Fluctuation display There is no time reduction to shorten the fluctuation time of the game. In addition, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is a normal mode. The main variable special figure is a special figure 1 variable display game, and the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed in order to aim at the starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation. In this normal game state ST1, a very long fluctuation time is set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the acquisition of a small hit in the normal game state ST1. ..

In the second specific game state ST3, the special figure probability is basically a low probability state. However, in the special game state based on the normal jackpot, when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 (when V is passed), the probability state is high. In addition, there is a general electric support that facilitates winning by improving the opening time per unit time of the ordinary variable winning device 37. If there is Fuden support, it will be possible to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the normal map fluctuation display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the chance mode. Further, the main variable special figure is a special figure 2 variable display game, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal variable winning device 37.
That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variable display game is the irregular variation.

In the first specific game state ST2, the special figure probability is a high probability state, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure changing display game. There is a certain amount of time to shorten the fluctuation time of. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is a small hit RUSH. Further, the main variable special figure is a special figure 2 variable display game, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal variable winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variable display game is the irregular variation.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the normal map fluctuation display game in the state with the normal power support (normal probability) is the same as the probability (normal probability) in the state without the normal power support. In a state where there is a normal power support, the normal probability can be set to a higher probability (high probability state of the normal figure) than the normal probability (low probability state of the normal figure).
Further, in the present embodiment, the state without the normal electric support means that the normal variable winning device 37 is opened, but the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 is shorter than the state with the normal electric support. be.

In the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is shortened as compared with the case of the normal game state ST1, and the normal variation winning device 37 is hit right. It is advantageous for the player to play the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at. The special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of a small hit than the special figure 1 variable display game (in the case of this embodiment, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0), and the small hit is won more than the big hit. Since there is a high probability that the game will occur, small hits occur frequently in the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3.
When the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit in the second specific game state ST3, the state in which the normal electric support is provided continues even in the special game state based on the small hit, and in the first specific game state ST2. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the state without the normal electric support continues even in the special game state based on the small hit. Further, in the special gaming state based on the small hit, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, but the first special variable winning device 38 is not opened (see FIG. 34 (d)).

Therefore, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the second specific game state ST3, most of the right-handed game balls in the special game state based on the small hit are normally variable winnings. A second device that wins a prize and is arranged below the normally variable winning device 37.
It does not flow down to the special variable winning device 39. Therefore, in the second specific game state ST3, small hits occur frequently, but it is difficult to increase the number of balls held by the player due to the small hits.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the first specific game state ST2, most of the right-handed game balls in the special game state based on the small hit are normally variable winnings. Instead of winning the device 37, the game flows down to the second special variable winning device 39 arranged below the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, in the first specific game state ST2, it is easy to increase the number of game balls of the player by a small hit. That is, in the first specific game state ST2, small hits occur frequently and the number of balls held by the player increases. Therefore, the effect mode is small hit RUSH.
It is said to be a mode called.

Of these three gaming states, the normal gaming state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The second specific game state ST3 is a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST1 because it has a general electric support. The first specific game state ST2 is a high-probability state, and further
Since the number of balls held by the player increases due to the frequent occurrence of small hits, this is a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3.

The transition of the game state is performed by ending the first special game state based on the derivation of the first special result, exhausting the specified number of games, and winning the fall lottery which is the transition lottery to the low probability state. .. Basically, the probability variation jackpot is derived to enter the first special gaming state, and in the first special gaming state, the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operation area) of the first special variation winning device 38 and the specific area switch. When it is detected in 38d (when V is passed), it shifts to the first specific gaming state ST2 after the end of the first special gaming state. On the other hand, when the probability variation jackpot is derived to enter the first special gaming state, and the game ball does not flow into the specific area (probability variation operation region) of the first special variation winning device 38 in the first special gaming state (no V passage). In the case of), the normal gaming state ST1 is entered after the end of the first special gaming state. In addition, when a normal jackpot is derived to enter the first special gaming state and there is no V passage in the first special gaming state, the second specific gaming state ST3 (special figure low probability) after the end of the first special gaming state. 2nd specific game state ST
Move to 3). On the other hand, when a normal jackpot is derived to enter the first special gaming state and there is a V passage in the first special gaming state, the second specific gaming state ST3 (special figure high probability) after the end of the first special gaming state. It shifts to the second specific game state ST3).
Further, when the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state in the second specific game state ST3, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. Also, the first
If the fall lottery is won in the specific game state ST2, the process shifts to the normal game state ST1.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. Further, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. also,
When the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, it is simply called a hit (special result). When the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a big hit, and the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small hit, are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a special gaming state.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming ball (from the hitting ball launching device 240 toward the gaming area 32)
The game is played by launching a pachinko ball). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , The starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, or the game area flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32. It is discharged from 32. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, or the second special variable winning device 39, the number according to the type of winning opening. The prize ball is discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 31) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the firing force and launches a game ball into the left gaming area (so-called left-handed) to move the starting winning opening 36 or the starting winning opening 36 to the left. It is possible to aim for a prize in the arranged general prize opening 35, and by launching a game ball into the right game area (so-called right-handed), the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the first special variable winning It is possible to aim for a prize in the device 38, the second special variable winning device 39, and the general winning opening 35 arranged on the right side of the second special variable winning device 39.

A gate switch 34a including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided in the normal drawing start gate 34, and the game area 32
When the game ball driven into the ball passes through the start gate 34 of the normal drawing, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the number of normal figure start storages is an upper limit number (for example, four) based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34. ), Add the number of memory for starting the normal figure (+1)
), And one memory for starting the normal drawing is stored in the ROM 111B. The number of stored numbers of the winnings for starting the normal drawing is displayed on the general drawing holding display 56 of the batch display device 50. In addition, the hit determination random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal map variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the normal map start memory. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a memory of starting the normal map and the normal variable display game can be started, that is, the normal variable display game is hit and the normal variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, that is, the normal map variable display game is not being executed. If it is not in the hit state, the hit judgment random value stored in the first stored normal map start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game. Then, the process of starting the normal map variation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

Further, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time in the normal map display unit 58 provided in the batch display device 50 as a process of executing the normal map variation display game. After performing the display during the fluctuation of the normal map, which is repeatedly displayed in the order given, the process of displaying the variable display game of the normal map, which stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result, is performed.
In addition, the general drawing display unit 58 is composed of a display device 41, and as ordinary identification information, for example, numbers, symbols, etc.
It is also possible to use a character symbol or the like, display it in a variable manner for a predetermined time, and then stop and display it to display the result.

When the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern, which is a special result mode, is stopped and displayed on the normal figure display unit 58, and the normal variable winning device 37 is operated by operating the normal electric solenoid 37c. Control is performed to open the device for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of alignment, the normal map display unit 58 is controlled to display a lighting pattern that is the result of the deviation.

Further, the winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively, which are provided inside.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) of the first start memory forming the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 is set.
The second start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). Based on the winning of the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, and each variable pattern random value are extracted as the starting memory information, respectively. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start memory and the second start memory. Then, the stored number of the start memory is the first storage display unit 53 (special figure 1 hold display) and the second memory display unit 54 (special figure 2 hold display) for notifying the start winning number of the batch display device 50. Is also displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decorative special drawing start memory display.

The game control device 100 plays a special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first variation display device) based on the first start memory, and the special figure 2 display 52 (1st variation display device) is based on the second start memory. The special figure 2 variable display game is played on the second variable display device). The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but while one special figure variable display game is being executed, the other special figure variable display game becomes the first special result (big hit). In that case, one of the special figure variation display games is terminated as a result other than the special result (missing result). In addition, if the other special figure variation display game has a second special result (small hit) during the execution of one special figure variation display game, the one is concerned until the end of the special gaming state based on the small hit. The special figure fluctuation display game of is interrupted.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 (first start winning area). It serves as a first execution control means for controlling. Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 is
It serves as a second execution control means for controlling the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area).

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after performing the variable display, a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit and becomes the first special game state (so-called big hit state).
Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result (small hit result mode). Then, it becomes a small hit and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, special figure 1
The display 51 serves as a first variable display means capable of displaying the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 serves as a second variable display means capable of displaying the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37.

Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 is in a jackpot game state (first special game state).
After the end of, control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can proceed in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (the probability of hitting is high and there is a general electric support). It is possible to do. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 forms the specific game state generating means.

In addition, the display device 41 corresponds to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.
A decorative special figure variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) is being executed. The decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. Yes, these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed according to the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 changes the decoration identification information in accordance with the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). It serves as a decorative variation display means that can display a decorative special figure variation display game). It should be noted that different display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one of the decorative special figure variable display games may be displayed. In addition, the gaming machine 1
The special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 at 0.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 variable display game (the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is 0), but it is special in the normal gaming state. FIG. 2 Fluctuation display A long variation with a very long variation time (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time in the normal game state, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the acquisition of a small hit in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is advantageous for the player to hit the left side to aim at the start winning opening 36 and play the special figure 1 variable display game.
The length variation time is about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.). Further, the time of the long fluctuation may be different depending on the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Specifically, for example, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is out of order or a small hit, a long variation with a variation time of about 10 minutes is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game. Special Figure 2 If the result of the variable display game is a big hit, the special figure 2
A long variation with a variation time of about 5 minutes may be selected as the variation pattern of the variation display game.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the game control device 10
The control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of 0 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 39 performed in a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs is used. The stack pointer setting process (step X2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X).
4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the upper rank, and the first 00h is set in step X4. Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step X5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, the game control device 1 serving as the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value.
Waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program of the slave control means (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instruction from 00 to start normally.
Is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can avoid missing commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to the validity judgment) that is not subject to the validity judgment (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X8), and if a power failure has occurred (step X8; Y), the power of the gaming machine is supplied. Wait for it to be blocked.
Specifically, in step X8, for example, the number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. Determine if there is any. Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the set number of checks. Then, if the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks, the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54 described later. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when a power failure has not occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10).
If the value of the timer is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). Further, when the value of the timer is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, when the waiting time ends,
Permission is given to RWM (read / write memory) that can be read and written to RAM, EEPROM, etc. (step X11), and off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step X12).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the present embodiment) is set (step X13), and the game microcomputer. A process (step X14) for activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator is a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and the CPU 1 based on the divided signal.
The 11A is provided with a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.
Next, the RAM error flag is set (step X15). Here, on the premise that there is an abnormality in the RAM regardless of whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X16), and if it is normal (step X16; Y),
Power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) in which the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal.
(Step X17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), the checksum calculation process (step X18) for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed, and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of are matched (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y)
Since there is no abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is cleared (step X20), and the process proceeds to step X21.

If it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), and if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step X19; N), the step. Based on the state read by X6, it is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the ON state (step X21). Then, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). When the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22; Y), since there is an abnormality in the RAM, the effect control board (effect control) issues a main abnormality error notification command for notifying that the game control device 100 is abnormal. It is transmitted to the device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). Then, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), the main abnormality error notification command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag set here is the probability setting flag set before the occurrence of a power failure. That is, if the power of the gaming machine is cut off and restarted while the probability setting value is being changed,
Since the operation of the game control device 100 is stopped, the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X25). As a result, in the performance display device 153,
The display as shown in FIG. 41 (h) is performed. After that, the on-data of the security signal is output and the off-data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X26).
, Return to step X25.

Further, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the ON state (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM error flag is set (step X27). Then, when the RAM error flag is not set (step X27).
; N) is set to the probability setting changing flag (step X29). As a result, the mode shifts to the probability setting value change mode. After that, the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X30), and the process proceeds to step X31. Based on receiving the command during the probability setting change, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, operates the board effect device 44, and the speaker 1.
Notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed is performed by outputting voice by 9a and 19b.
On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), the process of clearing the probability set value (step X28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the area for the probability setting value in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes “setting 1”. Then step X29,
The process of X30 is performed, and the process proceeds to step X31.

Further, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (Tep X22; N and step X23). In N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). Then, when the setting key switch 152 is not in the ON state (step X35; N).
), It is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

When it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not in the ON state (step X43; N)
That is, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the off state, the process proceeds to step X41 to perform the process when the power failure is normally restored.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state (step X43).
In Y), the process proceeds to step X44 to perform initialization processing. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make a means of conversion.

When the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state (step X35; Y), the probability setting checking flag is set (step X36). As a result, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode. After that, the command during the probability setting confirmation is issued to the effect control board (effect control device 300).
(Step X37). The effect control device 300 receives the command during the probability setting confirmation, and the display of the display device 41, the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46.
Due to the light emission, the operation of the board effect device 44, the output of sound by the speakers 19a and 19b, etc.
Notifies that the probability set value is being confirmed.

Then, in order to guarantee the output of the security signal for 50 msec or more, the value corresponding to 128 msec is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122) of the timer interrupt process in the probability setting value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, and in other cases, the external information editing of the timer interrupt process is edited. It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, 12
When the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode ends in less than 8 msec, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. That is, even if the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 msec, the security signal is output for 128 msec after shifting to the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode. NS. The value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 ms. However, at least 5 after shifting to the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode.
Since it is necessary to output a security signal for 0 msec, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 msec or more.

Then, the interrupt is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33). In step X33, the determination is not made based on the state read in step X6 (state at power-on), but the state read in the input process (step X103) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 39) (current state). Judge based on. When it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the off state, the probability setting value is determined.
When the setting key switch 152 is not in the off state (step X33; N), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (step X34), and when no power failure has occurred (step X34;
In N), the process returns to step X33, and if a power failure occurs (step X34; Y), the process proceeds to step X55. When it is determined in step X34 that a power failure has occurred while the probability setting changing flag is set, in step X23 of the main process (FIGS. 37 and 38) after the power failure is restored. It is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33; Y), a process for disabling interrupts (step X38) is performed. Processing to allow interrupts (step X32)
) And the process of disabling interrupts (steps X38 and X55), the timer interrupt process (FIG. 39) is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms). In the timer interrupt process, the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122), which is a process related to the probability set value.
) Is performed. That is, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability set value is completed (or until a power failure occurs).
Next, a command to end the notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X39). The effect control device 300 receives a command to end the notification, and is based on receiving the command to end the notification.
The execution notification (notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or notification indicating that the probability setting value is being confirmed) is terminated.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, when the probability setting checking flag is set. Is the area to be initialized (for example, the power failure inspection area,
The power failure recovery process (step X41) is performed to save the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the checksum area and the area related to error fraud monitoring. The probability setting checking flag is cleared in this step X41.
After that, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X42), and the process proceeds to step X47. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X42, a plurality of model designation commands, probability setting information commands, special figure 1 hold number commands, special figure 2 hold number commands, probability information commands, effect count information commands, screen designation commands, and the like. Send a command. As the screen designation command, if both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in the normal processing described later, that is, if the special figure variation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not in progress, the command is waiting for a customer. Send the command of the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command of the recovery screen. In addition to these commands, a high-probability number-of-times information command or the like is also transmitted depending on the model.

On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X44). In step X44, the RAM area for the probability set value (work area (1 byte area of the probability set value)) and the RAM area for performance display (display of base value and accessory ratio) (work area and stack area) are cleared. Instead, the game control RAM area (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0. Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared in this step X44. In step X44,
You may or may not clear the stack area or unused area.

Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X45).
.. The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X46). In the case of this embodiment, in step X46, a model designation command, a probability setting information command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, an effect number information command, and a RAM initialization command (waiting for customers). Along with displaying the demo screen, a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying the RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands,
It also sends a command for the number of times of production, a command for the number of times of support, which is information on the number of times the special figure variation display game with Fukuden support is executed.

Next, a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on.
Various initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special figure (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (win random number) ), R as the initial value (start value) of the random number (fall lottery random number) that determines whether or not the fall lottery is won.
After saving in the predetermined area of WM (step X48), enable interrupt (step X4).
9). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step X50) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number are generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock, and the jackpot symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, and fall lottery random number are processed by the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing which is a unit. In addition, in the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number, the so-called "initial value change method" in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. "Is adopted. The random numbers are +1 or -1.
It may be a counter expression update by, or a random expression update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.
In this embodiment, since a random number (hit symbol random number) for determining the hit symbol of the normal figure is not provided, there is only one type of hit symbol of the normal figure, but a hit symbol random number is provided and the hit symbol of the normal figure is provided. May be selected from a plurality of types.

After the initial value random number update process in step X50, the process of disabling interrupts (step X51)
Is performed, and the performance display editing process (step X52) is performed. Then, after performing the process of permitting the interrupt (step X53), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (step X54), and if no power failure has occurred (step X54; N), the initial value random number update process is performed. (Step X5
Return to 0). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process, the performance display editing process, and the power failure monitoring are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step X50) (step X49), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process will be executed with priority, and the timer interrupt will be executed. It is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step X50, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process, and when such a method is adopted, the initial value is set in both cases. In order to avoid executing the random number update process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process.
If the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage of simplifying the main process.

On the other hand, when a power failure occurs (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step X55) and a process of outputting off-data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57).
), The power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58).
Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X59) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step X60) for saving the calculated checksum, the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step X61), it waits for the power of the gaming machine to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to instructions from the main control means, etc. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control device) that delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.
Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data and a RAM 111C.
An initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization means that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112).
The game control device 100) is provided, and the operating state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.
Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started in a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and FIG. 39
Timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step X1).
01). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as in step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing (step X103) for reading the state of each input port is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104), and when the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104; Y). , Probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122)
To end the timer interrupt processing.
On the other hand, when both the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag are not set (step X104; N), the solenoids (special winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) are based on the output data set in various processes. , Lever solenoid 38f, Fuden solenoid 37
The output process (step X105) for controlling the drive of the actuator such as c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the launch permission status as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, the payout command transmission process (step X106), the random number update process 1 (step X107), in which the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes are output to the payout control device 200.
Random number update process 2 (step X108) is performed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switches 38a, 39a, setting the prize ball, the front frame and the glass The winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X109) for opening the frame and monitoring errors such as illegal winning of the normal variable winning device 37 and the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that the number of game balls discharged from the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e) in the first special variable winning device 38 is The number of game balls that have flowed into the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the large winning opening switch 38a) is exceeded. If an abnormal discharge is occurring, the abnormal discharge flag is set. Then, when an abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process proceeds to step X116. That is, the game is prevented from progressing.

On the other hand, when abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), the start port 1 switch 3
Start port switch monitoring process (step X) to monitor winning of 6a and start port 2 switch 37a
111). In the start port switch monitoring process, the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37
Various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted based on the winning of the game ball. And special figure 1
Special figure 1 game processing (step X112) that performs processing related to the variable display game, special figure 2 game processing (step X113) that performs processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game, and normal figure game processing that performs processing related to the normal figure variable display game. (Step X114) is performed, and a segment LED provided on the gaming machine 10 to display a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game.
Segment LED editing process (step X115)
I do.

Next, a magnet fraud monitoring process (step X116) that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determines whether or not there is an abnormality, and a process that checks the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and determines whether or not there is an abnormality. Radio fraud monitoring process (step X117), vibration fraud monitoring process (step X118) that checks the detection signal from the vibration sensor 65 to determine if there is any abnormality, and determines whether abnormal discharge has occurred. Perform the abnormal discharge monitoring process (step X119). Further, external information editing processing (step X120) for setting signals to be output to various external devices and performance display monitor control processing (step X121) for controlling the performance display monitor 153 are performed, and timer interrupt processing is completed. do.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. When (at the end of timer interrupt processing), it is automatically performed. Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process of restoring the register bank designation.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
FIG. 40 shows the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X1) in the timer interrupt process described above.
22) is shown. In this probability setting change / confirmation process, first, it is determined whether the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (range 0 to 5 in this embodiment) (step X13).
1).
When the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (step X131; Y)
The probability setting value display data corresponding to the value (current probability setting value) of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is set (step X132), and the probability setting value display data is transmitted to the second output port. Output to the fifth driver 138e via 134 (step X134). This will
In the performance display device 153, the display as shown in FIGS. 41 (a) to 41 (f) is performed.
On the other hand, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is not within the normal range (step X131).
In N), turn-off data is set as the probability set value display data (step X133).
The probability set value display data is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X134). As a result, in the performance display device 153, FIG. 41 (g)
The display as shown in is performed.

As shown in FIG. 41, the performance display device 153 is composed of four 7-segment displays (7-segment type display) arranged side by side. In the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the current probability setting value is shown on the rightmost 7-segment display among these four 7-segment displays, and "SET" is displayed on the remaining 7-segment display. "Is supposed to indicate the character.
Specifically, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "0", the current probability setting value is "setting 1", so as shown in FIG. 41 (a), the rightmost 7 When "1" is displayed on the 7-segment display and the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "1", the current probability setting value is "1".
Since it is "setting 2", "2" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 41 (b), and when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "2", it is currently Probability setting value of "Setting 3"
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), "3" is displayed on the 7-segment display at the right end, and RW.
When the value of the area for the probability setting value in M is "3", the current probability setting value is "setting 4", so that "setting 4" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 41 (d). 4 ”is displayed, and when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is“ 4 ”, the current probability setting value is“ setting 5 ”, so as shown in FIG. 41 (e), the right end When "5" is displayed on the 7-segment display and the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "5", the current probability setting value is "setting 6", so FIG. 4
As shown in 1 (f), "6" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display. Further, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range (abnormal value), the rightmost 7-segment display is turned off as shown in FIG. 41 (g).
For example, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "0", the probability setting value display data is "1" in the first digit, "T" in the second digit, and "T" in the third digit. The probability set value display data instructing to display "E" and "S" in the fourth digit is output to the fifth driver 138e.

Next, if the security signal control timer is not "0", the security signal control timer is updated by -1 (step X1).
35). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set in step X31 of the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0".
Next, the on-data of the security signal is output and the off-data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X136). In step X136, on-data of the security signal is output regardless of whether or not the security signal control timer is timed up. Therefore, the security signal will continue to be output during the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode (while the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting confirmation flag is set).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X137; N), that is, when the probability setting checking flag is set. Ends the probability setting change / confirmation process. On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137; Y), the probability setting change / confirmation process during execution is the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. It is determined whether it is a confirmation process (step X138).

If it is the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X138; Y), the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is not the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X138; N).
Determines if there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139).
In step X139, the RAM initialization switch 1 is performed in the immediately preceding input process (step X103).
When an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of 12 is detected, it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112. If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; N), the probability setting change / confirmation process ends.

On the other hand, when there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; Y),
That is, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is newly operated, the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5 (step X140), and the probability setting change / confirmation process is performed. finish. The value updated in step X140 (probability setting value after update) is displayed on the performance display device 153 by the next probability setting change / confirmation process.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33A, “setting 1” to “setting 6” are used for three types of probability values (probability value in a low probability state and probability value in a high probability state). Is assigned, but
For example, "setting 1" to "setting 3" may be assigned to three types of probability values (probability value in a low probability state and probability value in a high probability state). In this case, in step X140, the value of the region for the probability setting value of RWM is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 2.

By operating the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the mode can be shifted to the probability setting value change mode, and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated during the probability setting value change mode. You can change the probability setting value with.
Since the RAM initialization switch 112 can only perform a pressing operation, it is not possible to distinguish between a transition operation for shifting to the probability set value change mode and a change operation for changing the probability set value. Therefore, when the transition operation (the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability setting value change mode) continues even during the probability setting value change mode, that is, the RAM initialization switch is started from the time the power is turned on. If 112 is kept pressed, the probability setting value is updated (changed) according to the operation even though the operation is a transition operation.

Specifically, in the input process (step X103) of the timer interrupt process, the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the previous input process is off, and the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the current input process is in the off state. When the state is on, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is detected. In the input process (step X103) in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on, the input process immediately before the power is turned off is the previous input process, and the input process immediately after the power is turned on is the current input process. There is a high possibility that the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read by the process is the off state. That is, if the transition operation continues even during the probability set value change mode, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 in the input process (step X103) in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on. ) Is likely to be detected.
Therefore, in this case, if the processing of steps X139 and 140 is performed in the probability setting change / confirmation processing in the first timer interrupt processing after the power is turned on, it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 based on the transition operation. There may be a problem that the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is updated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to avoid such inconvenience, the process of step X138 is performed, and the process of steps X139 and X140 is not performed in the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on. I will do it. As a result, regarding the update (change) of the probability set value, the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that has continued since the power was turned on (
That is, since the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability setting value change mode is ignored, it is possible to prevent an unintended update.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is the first gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) becomes a special result.
A storage means for storing one of a plurality of probability setting values to which the operation unit (setting key operation unit) and the second operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) and the probability values used for the lottery of the game are assigned. (Game control device 100 (RAM111C)) and a mode for shifting to a probability setting value change mode in which the probability set value can be changed in response to the operation of the first operation unit and the second operation unit when the power of the game machine is turned on. In response to the operation of the transition means (game control device 100) and the second operation unit in the probability setting value change mode, the probability setting value stored in the storage means (value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM). ) Is provided, and the operation of the second operation unit (transition operation) for shifting to the probability setting value change mode and the second operation for changing the probability setting value are provided. The operation (change operation) of the operation unit is the same operation (pressing operation in the case of this embodiment), and the setting changing means continues from the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned on even in the probability setting value changing mode. It is configured not to respond to the operation of the second operation unit.
Therefore, if the operation (transition operation) of the second operation unit performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on continues even after the transition to the probability setting value change mode, the probability setting value is not changed during that time, which is not intended. It is possible to prevent the change of the probability set value.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
FIG. 42 shows the start port switch monitoring process (step X1) in the timer interrupt process described above.
11) is shown. In this start port switch monitoring process, first, the start port 1 (start winning opening 36)
Prepare the winning monitoring table (step X491) and perform the hard random number acquisition process (step X49).
Do 2). Then, it is determined whether or not there is information on starting opening winning that is set when a big hit random number is acquired based on winning the starting winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquisition process (step X49).
3).

If the starting opening winning information is not set based on the winning of the starting winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set.
On the other hand, when the information with the starting opening winning is set based on the winning of the starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (normal game state). (Step X494). Then, when the special figure has a low probability and there is no time reduction (step X49).
4; In Y), the process proceeds to step X497. In addition, if the special figure has a low probability and the time is not shortened (step X494; N), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X495).
, Performs the effect command setting process (step X496).

Based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs a right-handed instruction notification instructing the player to perform a right-handed hit by display, voice, or the like. Right-handed is more advantageous for the player when in the specific game state or special game state, and the start winning opening 36, which is designed so that the player cannot win unless the player is left-handed, is in the specific game state or special game state. When a prize is detected inside, a right-handed instruction is notified.

Then, a table for setting the hold information by the start port 1 is prepared (step X497).
, Special figure start port switch common processing (step X498) is performed. Next, the starting port 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) winning monitoring table was prepared (step X499), a hard random number acquisition process (step X500) was performed, and a jackpot random number was acquired based on the winning of the ordinary variable winning device 37. It is determined whether or not there is information on the starting opening winning that is set in the case (step X501).

When there is a start opening prize based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 and the information is not set (
In step X501; N), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set.
On the other hand, when the start port winning information is set based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 (step X501; Y), the normal electric (normal variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, normal. When it is determined whether or not the variable winning device 37 is activated to open the game ball in an open state (step X502), and when the normal electric power is operating (step X502; Y),
The process proceeds to step X504. On the other hand, when the electric power is not operating (step X502; N)
(Step X503).

In the determination of whether or not a fraudulent occurrence is occurring, it is determined that fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings in the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or fraud has occurred.
If there is a winning game ball in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal winnings.
Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

If an illegal operation is occurring (step X503; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more. Further, when the fraudulent electric power is not occurring (step X503; N), a table for setting the information of the hold by the start port 2 is prepared (step X504), and the special figure start port switch common process (step X50) is prepared.
5) is performed to end the start port switch monitoring process.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
FIG. 43 shows the special figure start port switch common process (steps X498, X505) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

In this special figure start port switch common process, first, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is provided to the gaming machine 1.
The start port signal output count, which is the number of outputs to the external management device of 0, is loaded (step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step). X523).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is R.
Saved in the start port signal output count area of the WM (step X524), the number of special figure hold (start memory) corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored, that is, the number of special figure hold (start memory) to be updated is the upper limit value (step X524). Here, it is determined whether it is less than 4) (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of outputs can be stored up to 255, but if the number of outputs is stored up to the upper limit, the value is not saved after the update because the loop is looped by +1 update and becomes 0.

Then, when the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step X525; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. On the other hand, when the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step X525; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1. (Step X526), the target start opening winning flag is saved (step X527). Next, the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step X528), and the big hit random number prepared by the hard random number acquisition process is saved in the big hit random number storage area of RWM. (Step X529).

After that, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X5).
30), save in the RWM jackpot symbol random number storage area (step X531). Next, the fall lottery random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X532), and the RWM is prepared.
Save in the fall lottery random number storage area (step X533).
Next, it is determined whether or not the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) has won a prize (step X53).
4) If the starting port 2 is not won (step X534; N), the process proceeds to step X537. On the other hand, in the case of winning the starting port 2 (step X534; Y), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X535), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X536). ..

Then, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step X537), and the special figure reservation information determination processing (step X53), which is a look-ahead process, is performed.
8) is performed. Next, a start port switch to be monitored and a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step X539), and an effect command setting process (step X540) is prepared.
Is performed to end the common processing of the special figure start port switch.
That is, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36, and the predetermined random number can be stored up to a predetermined upper limit as the first starting memory. It serves as a starting memory means. Further, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37, and the predetermined random number is used as the second random number.
It serves as a second start storage means that can store up to a predetermined upper limit as start memory.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
44 and 45 show the special figure hold information determination process (step X538) in the above-mentioned special figure start port switch common process. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In this special figure reservation information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (during the first special gaming state) (step X541), and if the jackpot is being hit (step X541; Y), the special figure reservation information determination is made. End the process. On the other hand, when the jackpot is not hit (step X541; N), the start opening winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure start opening switch common process is checked, and the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) is won. (Step X542).

If the starting port 1 is won (step X542; Y), the process proceeds to step X544 to perform look-ahead. On the other hand, if the starting port 1 is not won (step X542; N),
It is determined whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (during a normal game state) (step X543). Then, when the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress (step X543; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. That is, in the normal gaming state, a long variation with a very long variation time (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game, but in this case, the look-ahead is not performed. On the other hand, when the special figure is low probability & no time saving is not in progress (step X543; N)
), It is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (step X544).

If the special figure is not in high probability (step X544; N), the process proceeds to step X548. On the other hand, when the special figure has a high probability (step X544; Y), is the value of the fall lottery random number prepared in step X532 of the special figure start port switch common process within the range of the judgment value of the fall winning? Determine (step X545). Next, the look-ahead fall lottery information command corresponding to the determination result is prepared (step X546), the effect command setting process (step X547) is performed, and the low probability determination flag is prepared (step X548).

Then, a look-ahead jackpot determination process (step X549) is performed to determine whether the jackpot is a jackpot depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (big hit low probability determination value). When the determination result is a big hit (step X550; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step X551), and the preparation is made in step X530 of the special figure start port switch common process. Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number (
Step X552) and step X559. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step X550; N), the start port winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure start port switch common process is checked, and the start port 2 (normal variable winning device 37). (Step X553).

If the starting port 2 is not won (step X553; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step X558), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, in the case of winning the starting port 2 (step X553; Y), the small hit determination process (step X554) of determining whether the big hit random value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. I do. and,
When the determination result is a small hit (step X555; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step X556), and step X535 of the special figure start port switch common process is set.
Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in (step X557), and then
The process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a small hit (step X555;
In N), the out-of-order stop symbol information is set (step X558), and the stop symbol information acquired in step X552 or X557 or the stop symbol information set in step X558 is saved in the symbol information area (step). X559).

After that, the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information (
(Low probability) is prepared (step X560), and the effect command setting process (step X561)
I do.
Next, a high probability determination flag is prepared (step X562), and a look-ahead jackpot determination process (step X563) is performed to determine whether the jackpot is a jackpot based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (big hit high probability determination value). I do. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step X564; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step X565), and in step X530 of the special figure start port switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step X566), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, when the judgment result is not a big hit (step X564; N)
To check the start port winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure start port switch common process, it is determined whether or not the start port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) has won a prize (step X567).

If the starting port 2 is not won (step X567; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step X572), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, in the case of winning the starting port 2 (step X567; Y), the small hit determination process (step X568) of determining whether the big hit random value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. I do. and,
When the determination result is a small hit (step X569; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step X570), and step X535 of the special figure start port switch common process is set.
Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in (step X571), and then
The process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a small hit (step X569;
In N), the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step X572), and it is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (step X573).

Then, when the special figure is not in high probability (step X573; N), the process proceeds to step X575. On the other hand, when the special figure is in high probability (step X573; Y), step X55
The stop symbol information acquired in step X566 or X571 or the stop symbol information set in step X572 is overwritten and saved in the symbol information area in which the stop symbol information is saved in step X576 (step X574). The stop symbol information saved in the symbol information area is
It is used for look-ahead of fluctuation patterns.

Next, the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information (
Prepare (high probability) (step X575), and produce command setting process (step X576).
I do. As described above, in the present embodiment, each time the special figure reservation information determination process is executed, the result of determination by the jackpot low probability determination value and the result of determination by the jackpot high probability determination value are obtained by the effect control device 3.
It is sent to 00.
Next, the special figure information setting process (step X577) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process (step X578) for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed. I do.
Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step X579), and the effect command setting process (step X580) is performed to determine the special figure hold information. End the process. The special figure information setting process in step X577 and the variation pattern setting process in step X578 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing.

By the above processing, the look-ahead fall lottery information command including the lottery result of the fall lottery for the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and the look-ahead stop including the result of the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target. A symbol command and a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command including information on the fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory are prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, whether or not the result-related information corresponding to the start memory (whether or not the jackpot probability state shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state (normal probability state)) and whether or not the jackpot or small hit is achieved. , The type of variation pattern) determination result (look-ahead result) is set before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.
0 can be notified, and in particular, the result-related information is notified to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means capable of determining the result of the variation display game and the variation mode information before the start of the variation display game based on the start memory stored in the start storage means. Further, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start storage means before executing the variation display game based on the start memory (for example, determines whether or not a special result is obtained). Make a preliminary judgment means. The time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not limited to the start prize when the start memory occurs.
It may be any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is played.

[Look-ahead jackpot judgment processing]
FIG. 46 shows a look-ahead jackpot determination process (step X) in the above-mentioned special figure hold information determination process.
549, X563) was shown. In this look-ahead jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step X581), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step X582). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step X582; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step X587), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process is terminated. In addition, the loss as a judgment result indicates that the lottery for the big hit has been missed.
On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step X582; N), it is determined whether the determination flag is the high probability determination flag (step X583). When the judgment flag is a high probability judgment flag (step X583; Y), the upper limit judgment value in high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X584), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step X586). On the other hand, when the determination flag is not the high probability determination flag (step X583; N), that is, when it is the low probability determination flag, the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X585). ), It is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586).

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step X587), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586; N), that is, when it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step X588), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
FIG. 47 shows a special figure 1 game process (step X112) in the timer interrupt process described above.
showed that. In the special figure 1 game process, control of the entire process related to the special figure 1 variable display game and setting of the display of the special figure 1 are performed. In this special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag that is set when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted is set (step Y100). In the special figure 1 variable display game, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the second special result (small hit) and the second special gaming state is executed during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game. , Is interrupted during the execution of the second special game state.

If the special figure 1 interruption flag is not set (step Y100; N), that is, if the special figure 1 variation display game is not interrupted, the process proceeds to step Y101, and the subsequent special figure 1 variation display is performed. Perform game-related processing. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 interruption flag is set (step Y100; Y), that is, when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game in steps Y101 to Y115 is performed. Instead, the process proceeds to step Y116. As a result, while the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the special figure 1 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

In the processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game, first of all, whether the big hit / small hit of special figure 2 is in progress.
That is, it is determined whether or not the player is in the special gaming state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit (step Y101). Then, when the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2 is in progress (step Y101; Y), the process proceeds to step Y104. On the other hand, when the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2 is not in progress (step Y101; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y102) is performed, and the specific area switch monitoring process (step Y103) is performed.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. To monitor and set the large winning opening count command to be transmitted to the production control device 300 based on the winning to the large winning opening, and to close the large winning opening when the specified number of winnings are received in the large winning opening. Is processed. In the special figure 1 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit, and the result of the special figure 2 variable display game. Regarding the special game state executed based on the fact that is a big hit or a small hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process described later.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the specific area is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (probability operating area). Performs the process of setting the area passage flag. Based on the setting of this specific area passage flag, a process for generating a special gaming state is performed.

Next, if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y104), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y105). And special figure 1
If the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y105; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y116. Further, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y105; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the process is branched to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in the register (step Y106).
Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is acquired (step Y107), and a subroutine call is performed using the special figure 1 game processing number (step Y107).
Step Y108).

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and effect setting of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 1 variable display game are set. Figure 1
Setting information required to perform processing during fluctuations Special Figure 1 Normal processing (step Y109)
I do.
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the special figure 1 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display processing, and the like. 1 Perform the variable processing (step Y110).
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and each big hit type Set the fanfare time according to the opening pattern of the big prize opening, set the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, etc. Special Figure 1 Displaying processing (
Step Y111) is performed.

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the large winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set. The fanfare / interval processing (step Y112) to be performed is performed.
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y113) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, a process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or
Special figure 1 The large winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y114) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed.
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y115) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal process (step Y109). I do.

After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (
Step Y116), the lever solenoid control process (step Y116) that controls the operation of the lever solenoid 38f by performing the symbol variation control process (step Y117) according to the special figure 1 display 51.
118) is performed to end the special figure 1 game processing. This special figure 1 game process performs a process of performing a series of execution control related to the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
48 and 49 show the special figure 2 game processing (step X113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing. In the special figure 2 game process, control of the entire process related to the special figure 2 variable display game and setting of the display of the special figure 2 are performed. The special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the special figure 1 game processing described above for the special figure 2.

In this special figure 2 game processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is in the big hit, that is, in the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being the big hit (step). Y131). Then, when the jackpot in Special Figure 1 is in progress (step Y131; Y)
To step Y134. Also, when the jackpot in Special Figure 1 is not in progress (step Y1)
In 31; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y132) is performed, and the specific area switch monitoring process (step Y133) is performed.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. To monitor and set the large winning opening count command to be transmitted to the production control device 300 based on the winning to the large winning opening, and to close the large winning opening when the specified number of winnings are received in the large winning opening. Is processed. In the special figure 2 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit, and the special figure 1 variable display is performed. Regarding the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the specific area is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (probability operating area). Performs the process of setting the area passage flag. Based on the setting of this specific area passage flag, a process for generating a special gaming state is performed.

Next, if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y134), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135). And special figure 2
If the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y153. Further, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0. (Step Y136).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y136; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y137), and the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is extended to the special figure 2 game processing timer area. The fluctuation timer value (for example, 60,000 msec) is saved (step Y138), and the process proceeds to step Y153.
In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variable display game with a high probability of small hits in the normal gaming state, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state is very long. (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at once even if the upper limit value is set as the initial value of the timer. Therefore, the fluctuation time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times the time is measured for a specified time (for example, 60,000 msec).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y136; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is set in the register. Set (step Y139). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired (step Y14).
0), a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y141).

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and effect setting of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variable display game are set. Figure 2
Setting information required to perform processing during fluctuations Special Figure 2 Normal processing (step Y142)
I do.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the special figure 2 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display processing, and the like. 2 Perform the variable processing (step Y143).
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and each big hit type Set the fanfare time according to the opening pattern of the big prize opening, set the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, etc. Special Figure 2 Displaying processing (
Step Y144) is performed.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the large winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y145).
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y146) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, a process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or
Special figure 2 The large winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y147) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", special figure 2 jackpot end processing (step Y148) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108). I do.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the large winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command is set, and the small hit medium processing is performed. Processing during small hit fanfare (step Y1) to set necessary information for
49).
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step Y150) for setting the ending command, setting the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. conduct.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", the process of setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end. The small hit remaining ball processing (step Y151) for setting the information necessary for performing the processing is performed.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y152) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (
Step Y153), a lever solenoid control process (step Y) that controls the operation of the lever solenoid 38f by performing the symbol variation control process (step Y154) related to the special figure 2 display 52.
155) is performed to end the special figure 2 game processing. This special figure 2 game process performs a process of performing a series of execution control regarding the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing for special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. The corresponding processing will be described in parallel in.

[Special figure 1 Normal processing]
FIG. 50 shows the special figure 1 normal processing (step Y109) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 in this determination can start the fluctuation is not between the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special gaming state. In addition, although it is in a state where the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game, in that case, since the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 1 cannot start changing (step Y201; N), "0" is set as the special figure 1 game processing number (step Y216), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area. (Step Y217), Special Figure 1 The normal processing is completed. Further, when the special figure 1 is capable of starting fluctuation (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202).
If the left-handed instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-handed instruction notification has not been notified (step Y202; N), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and the effect command setting process (step Y20) is prepared.
4) is performed to set the left-handed instruction notification flag (step Y205). The left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared when the specific game state ends, so that the left-handed instruction notification is performed when shifting to the normal game state.

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y206), and if the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. Further, when the number of pending special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y206; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and an effect command setting process (step Y2) is prepared.
08) is performed. After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) for setting the information related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed, and the decorative special figure 1 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step Y210). ), The effect command setting process (step Y211) is performed.
At the time of performing the process of preparing the decorative special figure hold number command (step Y210), the special figure 1 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 hold is not performed. A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number obtained by subtracting -1 from the number is prepared. After that, the remaining game count command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number is prepared (step Y212), and the effect command setting process (step Y213) is performed.

Next, the special figure 1 changing state is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y21).
4). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure variation display game, and is 0 to 5.
Is set. Special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed. The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Further, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 is the first special game state which is a special game state based on the jackpot. The special figure status 5 indicates that the game is in the second special game state, which is a special game state based on a small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 variable display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status. After that, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (step Y215) is performed to end the special figure 1 normal process.

[Special figure 2 Normal processing]
FIG. 51 shows the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y142) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing. In this special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 in this determination can start the fluctuation is not between the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, which is a big hit, and the end of the special gaming state. In addition, although it is in a state where the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, in that case, the special figure 2 is in a state where the normal processing is not executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 2 cannot start changing (step Y221; N), "0" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y238), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area. (Step Y239), Special Figure 2 The normal processing is completed. Further, when the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (step Y222).

Then, when the number of pending special figures 2 is not 0 (step Y222; N), the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and the effect command setting process (step Y224) is performed. .. After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y225) for setting the information related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and the decorative special figure 2 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared (step Y226). ), The effect command setting process (step Y227) is performed. The process of preparing the decoration special figure hold number command (step Y226).
At the time of performing, the special figure 2 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number -1 from the current special figure 2 hold number. Is preparing. After that, the remaining game count command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number is prepared (step Y228), and the effect command setting process (step Y229) is performed.

Next, the special figure 2 changing state is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y23).
0). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status.
Is set. After that, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (step Y231) is performed to end the special figure 2 normal process.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step Y222; Y), the special figure 1 hold number is 0.
(Step Y232). Then, when the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 0 (step Y232; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (step Y233). Then, when the special figure 1 is not changing (step Y233; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has started (step Y234), and when it has not started (step Y234; N), it is determined.
Performs processing related to setting the customer waiting state. Further, when the number of pending special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y).
232; N), if the special figure 1 is changing (step Y233; Y) or if the customer waiting demo has already started (step Y234; Y), the process proceeds to step Y238.

In the process related to the setting of the customer waiting state, first, the customer waiting demo flag area is set (step Y235), the customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y236), and the effect is produced. The command setting process (step Y237) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y238. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

Further, if the effect control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the effect control device 300 that does not have the backup function loses the game state information, so that it becomes impossible to perform an appropriate effect. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and the probability information command based on the change in the game state is transmitted. You will be able to return to the production according to the game state faster than waiting.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, and it is conceivable that the probability state changes depending on the processing of the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, the fluctuation start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure fluctuation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). As a result, the effect control device 30
At 0, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the gaming state.

In addition, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command every time the special figure fluctuation display game starts, even if the effect control device 300 is restarted, the effect according to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. This makes it possible to return to the effect according to the game state faster than waiting for the probability information command based on the change in the game state to be transmitted. It should be noted that the customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for allowing the effect control device 300 to return to the effect according to the game state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
FIG. 52 (a) shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y2) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 normal process.
09) was shown. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game. In this special figure 1 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 1 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure hold information determination process is set (step Y241). Then R
WM special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for hold number 1) is loaded with random numbers and prepared (step Y242), and special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for hold number 1) is cleared to 0 (step). Y
243), a fall lottery process (step Y24) that draws a lottery for the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state.
4) is performed. The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y245) for setting the missed information or the jackpot information as the result information of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed, and the special figure 1 stop related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) is performed. The symbol setting process (step Y246) is performed. Then, the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y24) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern.
7) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (step Y248).

After that, in the special figure 1 variation display game, a variation pattern, which is a variation mode in the game, is set.
The variation pattern setting process (step Y249) is performed, the variation start information setting process (step Y250) for setting the variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed, and the time reduction variation number update process (step Y251) is performed. .. Next, "1" related to the special figure 1 changing process is set as the process number (step Y252), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step Y253).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y254), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of special figure 1 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y255). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y256), and the blinking control timer (special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area.
Save the initial value (here, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer) (step Y257).
), The initial value (here, “0” indicating a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during the change of the special figure 1 (step Y258), and the change start process of the special figure 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 52 (b) shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y2) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 normal process.
25) is shown. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 2 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure hold information determination process is set (step Y261). Then R
WM special figure 2 fall lottery random number storage area (for hold number 1) is loaded with random numbers and prepared (step Y262), and special figure 2 fall lottery random number storage area (for hold number 1) is cleared to 0 (step). Y
263), a fall lottery process (step Y26) that draws a lottery for the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state.
4) is performed. The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2).

Next, the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y265) for setting the missed information, the jackpot information, or the small hit information is performed as the result information of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) is performed. Special figure 2 Stop symbol setting process (step Y266) is performed. Then, in order to perform the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y267) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern, and to refer to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. A special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which the information of the above is set, is prepared (step Y268).

After that, in the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the game, is set.
The variation pattern setting process (step Y269) is performed, the variation start information setting process (step Y270) for setting the variation start information of the special figure 2 variation display game is performed, and the time reduction variation start update process (step Y271) is performed. .. Next, "1" related to the special figure 2 changing process is set as the process number (step Y272), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step Y273).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y274), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of special figure 2 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 2 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y275). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y276), and the blinking control timer (special figure 2 indicator 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area.
Save the initial value (here, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer) (step Y277).
), The initial value (here, "0" indicating a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during the change of the special figure 2 (step Y278), and the change start process of the special figure 2 is terminated.

In addition, when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of suggesting or notifying the probability set value, such as selecting a fluctuation pattern according to the probability set value or making the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern different according to the probability set value.

[Fall lottery process]
FIG. 53 shows a fall lottery process (steps Y244 and Y264) performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 change start process. In this fall lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (step Y581), and if it is not in the special figure high probability (step Y581; N), the fall lottery process ends. In addition, when the special figure is in high probability (step Y581; Y)
Is determined whether the value of the target fall lottery random number is less than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582).
). It should be noted that winning the fall lottery means that the fall lottery random number matches the fall lottery determination value. The fall lottery judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the fall lottery random number is equal to or higher than the fall lottery lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the fall lottery judgment value and is the upper limit value of the fall lottery judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value, it is determined that the fall lottery has been won.

If the value of the fall lottery random number is less than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582; Y), that is, if the fall lottery is not won, the fall lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the value of the fall lottery random number is not less than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582; N), it is determined whether the value of the target fall lottery random number is larger than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (step Y583).
If the value of the fall lottery random number is larger than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (step Y583; Y), that is, if the fall lottery is not won, the fall lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the value of the fall lottery random number is not larger than the fall lottery upper limit judgment value (
Step X583; N), that is, when the fall lottery is won, the process for shifting to the low probability state is performed.

In the process for shifting to the low probability state, first, the signal relating to the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to ON, and the big hit 4 signal is set to OFF. Next, the signal relating to the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is O.
FF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal OFF,
Special symbol 2 Set the fluctuation time shortening status signal to OFF.
Then, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y5).
86), save the number without time reduction in the game status display number area (step Y587). After that, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y588), and the fall lottery process is completed. As a result, the state becomes a low probability state and there is no general electric support, and the state shifts to the normal game state. Information on the end of the high-probability state and the end of the general electric support is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 3
In 00, processing such as changing the effect mode is performed based on this information.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 54A shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y245) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step Y281). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (step Y282), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (for the number of hold 1). Step Y283).

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y284), and when it is a jackpot (step Y284; Y).
Ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not big hits. If it is not a big hit (step Y284; N), a big hit determination process (step Y285) is performed to determine whether the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y285) is a jackpot (step Y286; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step Y281 (step). Y287), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit judgment process (step Y285) is not a big hit (
In step Y286; N), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. In this case, the loss information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 54 (b) shows the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y265) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, RWM's special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for 1 hold number)
Load and prepare the jackpot random number from (step Y293), and special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (step Y293).
Clear 0 (for 1 hold number) (step Y294).

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 1 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y295), and when it is a jackpot (step Y295; Y).
To step Y299. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not big hits. If it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.
Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is a jackpot (step Y297; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step Y292 (step). Y298), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed.

On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is not a big hit (step Y297; N), it is determined whether the acquired big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step Y299) is performed.
Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y291. Save (step Y301) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (
In step Y300; N), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 55 shows the jackpot determination process (steps Y285, Y296) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process described above. In this jackpot judgment process, first
The lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. In addition, the loss as a judgment result indicates that the lottery for the big hit has been missed. On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; N).
), It is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (step Y313).

Then, when the special figure is in high probability (step Y313; Y), the upper limit determination value in high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step Y314), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step Y316). Further, when the special figure is not in the high probability (step Y313; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step Y315), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit determination. Determine if it is greater than the value (
Step Y316).

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y31).
6; N), that is, in the case of a big hit, a big hit is set as a judgment result (step Y).
318), the jackpot determination process is completed.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 56 shows a small hit determination process (step Y29) in the above-mentioned big hit flag 2 setting process.
9) was shown. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether the value of the target large hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). The small hit means that the big hit random number (the same random number as the big hit determination) matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or more than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Moreover, the big hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value do not overlap.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; Y), that is, when it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y323), and the small hit determination process is terminated. In addition, the loss as a judgment result indicates that the lottery for small hits has been missed. When the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the target jackpot random number value is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y321; N).
Step Y322).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y322; Y), that is, when it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y323), and the small hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y322; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step Y324), and the small hit determination process is performed. finish.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 57 shows a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process.
246) was shown. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1
Load the jackpot symbol random number from the jackpot symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) (step Y3)
32). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (step Y333), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y333).
Step Y334). The jackpot type is selected by this process. The stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y335).
Step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure display (here, special figure 1 display 51).
This is for setting the stop symbol at the display device 41 and the stop symbol at the display device 41. Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y337), and the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired to obtain the number of special figure 1 rounds. Save in the upper limit information area (step Y338), acquire the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number, save it in the special drawing 1 large winning opening opening information area (step Y339), and proceed to step Y340. .. This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y344), and the missed stop symbol pattern is set in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area. Save (step Y345). Next, the decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared and saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y340). As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. After that, the effect command setting process (step Y341) is performed. As a result, the decorative special figure 1 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y342), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y343), and the special figure 1 Stop The symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 58 shows a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process.
266) was shown. The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step Y361), and when it is a jackpot (step Y3).
In 61; Y), the jackpot symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step Y362). Next, set the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table (step Y).
363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y364). The jackpot type is selected by this process.
The stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area when a special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y365).
Step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure display (here, special figure 2 display 52).
This is for setting the stop symbol at the display device 41 and the stop symbol at the display device 41. Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y367), and the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired to obtain the number of special figure 2 rounds. Save in the upper limit information area (step Y368), acquire the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number, save it in the special drawing 2 large winning opening opening information area (step Y369), and proceed to step Y370. .. This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y375), and if it is a small hit (step Y375; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number. Load the small hit symbol random number from the storage area (for 1 hold number) (step Y37)
6). Next, the special figure 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y377), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y378). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y).
379), the process proceeds to step Y370.

If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y375; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y380), and the miss stop symbol pattern is set as a special figure. 2 Save in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y381). Next, the decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared and saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y370). As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. After that, the effect command setting process (step Y371) is performed. As a result, the decorative special figure 2 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y372).
, Special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for hold number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y373), special figure 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for hold number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y374), special figure 2 FIG. 2 The stop symbol setting process is terminated.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
Based on the first start storage stored in the first start storage means, the game control device 100 starts the first variation display game by displaying the result and the variation mode information of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). It is the first decision-making tool that can be decided before. In addition, the game control device 100
Based on the second start memory stored in the second start storage means, the result of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) and the variation mode information can be determined before the start of the second variation display game. Make a possible second decision. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

From the above, the start winning opening 36 is arranged at a position where the game ball fired on one side of the game area 32 can win, and the normal variable winning device 37 is the game ball fired on the other side of the game area 32. Is arranged at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variation display game includes information on the variation time in which the execution time of the variation display game can be specified, and the second determination is made in the normal state (normal game state). The variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the second variation display game by the means is longer than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the first variation display game by the first determination means. Become.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. Examples include variable commands that include information about patterns. By transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a first variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game processing.
Further, the game control device 100 serves as a second variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game processing.

Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game determined by the first determination means and the result and variation mode information of the second variation display game determined by the second determination means. As a transmission means capable of transmitting to the effect control means (effect control device 300). Further, when the game control device 100 starts measuring the fluctuation time for each of the first fluctuation display game and the second fluctuation display game according to the start of the fluctuation display game, and the measurement time elapses. It serves as a measurement means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

In the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state, a long variation with a very long variation time is set, but in this case, the information about the variation time is not transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the variation is long. You may want to send a command that only indicates that. In the case of long fluctuation, it is sufficient to simply display the fluctuation, and it is not necessary to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the variation display based on receiving the command of long variation.
The fluctuation time is managed only by the game control device 100, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the end of the fluctuation time, and the effect control device 300 stops the variation display based on receiving the stop command. To do so. In this way, the effect control device 300
It is possible to reduce the burden of control in.

[Special Figure 1 Information Setting Process]
FIG. 59 shows the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y24) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process.
7) was shown. In this special figure 1 information setting process, first, the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y401), and the first half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern,
The second half offset data is acquired (step Y402), and the special figure 1 jackpot, that is, the special figure 1
It is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot stop symbol pattern (step Y403).
In the case of a special figure 1 big hit (step Y403; Y), the process proceeds to step Y405.

If it is not a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y403; N), the value is converted by adding the special figure 1 hold number to the first half offset data (step Y404). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y405). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is later used to select a fluctuation group.

After that, the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y405).
), End the special figure 1 information setting process. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is later used to select a fluctuation group.
In this way, in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation pattern is determined in consideration of the special figure 1 hold number only in the first half fluctuation pattern in the case of a miss, and in the case of a big hit, consider the special figure 1 hold number. The fluctuation pattern is determined without.

[Special Figure 2 Information Setting Process]
FIG. 60 shows the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y26) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process.
7) was shown. In this special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (during a normal game state) (step Y421). Special figure Low probability & No time saving If not in the middle (
In step Y421; N), it is determined whether or not the time is the final variation (step Y427).
.. Here, the special figure 2 variable display game to be started from now on is 100 from the end of the special game state.
In the case of the special figure variation display game of the number of times (number of times of support), it is determined that the final variation is shortened in time.

Then, in the case of the time reduction final variation (step Y427; Y), step Y42
Move to 8. If the time is not the final variation (step Y427; N), the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y423), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern are acquired. (Step Y424),
The process proceeds to step Y425.

On the other hand, when the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (step Y421; Y), it is determined whether the final variation has a high probability (step Y427). Here, when the fall lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game to be started is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability.
Then, in the case of a high-probability final variation (step Y427; Y), the first half offset data and the second half offset data for the final variation are set (step Y428), and step Y
Move to 425.
If it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y427; N), it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 2 jackpot (step Y429). And when it is not a special figure 2 big hit (step Y42)
In 9; N), the first half offset data for the low probability special figure 2 miss / small hit is set (step Y430), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set (step Y432).
), The process proceeds to step Y425.

Further, in the case of the special figure 2 big hit (step Y429; Y), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 big hit at low probability is set (step Y431), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set. (Step Y432). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y425). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is later used to select a fluctuation group.

After that, the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y426).
), The special figure 2 information setting process is completed. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is later used to select a fluctuation group.
As described above, in the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation pattern is determined without considering the number of reservations in the special figure 2.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 61 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y249) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. It consists of a pattern, and the latter half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

In this special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group address table is set (step Y451), and the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y452). The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of FIG. 1 (step Y453).
Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is off, that is, the stop symbol pattern is the off-stop symbol pattern (step Y454), and when the special figure 1 is off (step Y454; Y), 2
Byte distribution processing (step Y455) is performed. If the special figure 1 is not out of alignment (step Y454; N), the sorting process (step Y456) is performed.

In the present embodiment, the structure of the latter half variable group table is different between the one for hitting and the one for hitting. Specifically, the hit size is 1 byte size, and the loss size is 2 byte size. Since the rate of occurrence of hits is lower than the rate of occurrence of loss and one byte is sufficient, the size of hits is one byte from the viewpoint of saving data capacity. Therefore, at the time of hitting, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the rate of occurrence of loss is higher than the rate of occurrence of hit, and in order to enable a wider variety of effects, the size for loss is 2 bytes.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 1. And prepare (step Y458). Next, the distribution process (step Y459) is performed, and the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variable number area (step Y460). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y461), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y462). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (
Step Y463), the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 1 (step Y464).
After that, the distribution process (step Y465) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y466), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be started is set.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 62 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y269) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group address table is set (step Y471), and the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y472). The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of holds 1) in FIG. 2 (step Y).
473).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is off, that is, the stop symbol pattern is the off-stop symbol pattern (step Y474), and when the special figure 2 is off (step Y474; Y), 2
Byte distribution processing (step Y475) is performed. If the special figure 2 is not out of alignment (step Y474; N), the sorting process (step Y476) is performed.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 2. And prepare (step Y478). Next, the distribution process (step Y479) is performed, and the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variable number area (step Y480). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y481), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (
Step Y483), the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 2 (step Y484).
After that, the distribution process (step Y485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y486), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started is set.

[Fluctuation start information setting process]
FIG. 63 shows the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps Y250, Y270) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing. In this fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y551). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y552), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y553). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y554), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y555). Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step Y556), and the added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (step Y5).
57).

In the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal game state, a long variation with a very long variation time is set. In this case, the above added value is the specified time (here, 60,000 m).
The remaining time (seconds) excluding the time that can be timed using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times the time is performed.
(Time less than 60,000 msec) is calculated as an additional value.

After that, it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y558), and if the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y558; Y), the process proceeds to step Y562. Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not set (step Y558; N), that is, when the information of the special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether the long variation of the special figure 2 has started (step Y559). The long variation is a variation pattern set in the normal gaming state of the special figure 2 variation display game, and is determined by the number of the set variation pattern.

Then, when it is not the start of the long variation of special figure 2 (step Y559; N), 0 is set to special figure 2.
Save in the repeat count area of the game processing timer (step Y560). In addition, special figure 2
In the case of the start of the long fluctuation of (step Y559; Y), 9 is saved in the repeat count region of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y561).

After that, a variable command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variable number is prepared (step Y562).
, The variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the latter half variation number is prepared (step Y563), and the effect command setting process (step Y564) is performed. Next, the number of pending targets is updated by -1 (step Y566), the contents of the target random number storage area are shifted (step Y566), the free area after the shift is cleared (step Y567), and the fluctuation start information is set. End the process.

In the present embodiment, the number of repetitions is set for the long variation of FIG. 2 in order to vary the time that is not enough for the 2-byte timer. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the addition result is 600.
The timer for 00msec, the number of repetitions of 9 is saved, the timer is subtracted by the timer interrupt processing, and when the time is up, the number of repetitions is subtracted by 1 and the game processing timer is 60000m.
Set the seconds. As a result, the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation in Special Figure 2 is 10 minutes (= 60,000 ms x).
10). Since the timer interrupt cycle is 4 msec, it can be set up to about 262 seconds with 2 bytes, but for ease of understanding, it can be expressed by multiplying by 60 seconds.

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update process]
FIG. 64 shows the time reduction fluctuation number update processing (steps Y251 and Y271) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing. In this time reduction fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is in the high probability (in the high probability state) (step Y571), and if the special figure is in the high probability (step Y571; Y), the time is reached. The shortened fluctuation count update process is terminated. Further, when the special figure is not in the high probability (step Y571; N), it is determined whether the special figure time is shortened (step Y572). Then, when the special time is not shortened (step Y572; N).
) Ends the time reduction variation number update process. Further, when the special figure time reduction is in progress (step Y572; Y), the time reduction variation number is updated by -1 (step Y573), and it is determined whether the time reduction variation number is "0" (step Y574). ..

If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not "0" (step A754; N), the time reduction fluctuation number update process is terminated. Further, when the number of time reduction fluctuations becomes "0" (step Y57).
In 4; Y), a signal relating to the end of the time saving state (for example, turning off the jackpot 2 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y575), and a signal relating to the end of the time saving state (for example, the signal indicating the end of the time saving state) is saved.
Special symbol 1 Fluctuation time shortened state signal OFF, Special symbol 2 Fluctuation time shortened status signal OFF,
Normal symbol 1 Turn off the fluctuation time shortening state signal, turn off the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal)
Is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y576).
Next, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y577), and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y578).
), Save the normal map time reduction flag in the normal map game mode flag area (step Y579).
), Ends the time reduction fluctuation count update process.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 65 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y110) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.
showed that. In this special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y621). Then, load the command from the decoration special figure 1 command area and prepare (
Step Y622) and the effect command setting process (step Y623) are performed.

Next, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and the effect command setting process (step Y625) is performed. Since the gaming machine of the present embodiment may be forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of the fluctuation, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the fluctuation is stopped. .. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y626). In the present embodiment, for example, 600 in the case of disconnection.
A display time of m seconds, or 2000 msec in the case of a big hit, is set.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special drawing 1 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y627). If it is out of the special figure 1 (step Y627; Y), the process proceeds to step Y642. In addition, when the special figure 1 is not out of place (step Y627;
N), that is, in the case of a big hit, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y628). Whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 2 variation display game is not being executed (step Y628; Y), the process proceeds to step Y639. Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y628; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 display process is being performed (step Y629). That is, in this case, based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit, the special figure 2 being executed
This is a case where the variable display game is forcibly stopped due to a loss result. Note that even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of special figure 2 is in progress (step Y639; Y), the process proceeds to step Y631. Further, when the special figure 2 is not being processed during display (step Y629; N), the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y630), and the special figure 1 is set as the display time of the special figure 2. The display time + 4 msec display time is set (step Y631). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of 4 msec as the display time of the special figure 2, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 end at the same time. Even if the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started. This resetting extends the stop display time, but may shorten it in some cases.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y632), and the decorative special figure 2 off-design command is set and prepared (step Y633). Then, the symbol command is saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y634), and the effect command setting process (step Y635) is performed. After that, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y636), the effect command setting process (step Y638) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y638) is performed.

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y639), and the information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area. (Step Y640), the information is loaded from the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y641). After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y642), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y643) is performed to perform the special figure 1 stop symbol area.
Ends the process being displayed.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 66 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y143) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process.
showed that. In this special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y651). Then, load the command from the decoration special figure 2 command area and prepare (
Step Y652) and the effect command setting process (step Y653) are performed.

Next, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and the effect command setting process (step Y655) is performed. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y656). In the present embodiment, for example, a display time of 600 msec is set in the case of a miss, 600 msec in the case of a big hit, and 136 msec in the case of a small hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special drawing 2 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y657). If it is out of the special figure 2 (step Y657; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. In addition, when the special figure 2 is not out of place (step Y657;
N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y658). Whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 1 variation display game is not being executed (step Y658; N), the process proceeds to step Y673. Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y658; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (step Y659). ). Special figure 2 When it is not a big hit (step Y65)
9; N), that is, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (step Y670), and the decorative special figure 1 interruption command is prepared (step Y671). ), Perform the effect command setting process (step Y672), and step Y673.
Move to.

That is, in this case, the running special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit. It should be noted that even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The interrupted special figure 1 variable display game is restarted with the end of the special gaming state (second special gaming state) based on the small hit (second special result).

On the other hand, in the case of a special figure 2 big hit (step Y659; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 display is being processed (step Y660). That is, in this case, based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a disengagement result. Note that even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of special figure 1 is in progress (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y662. If the special figure 1 is not being processed during display (step Y660; N), the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y661), and the display time of the special figure 1 is set as the display time of the special figure 2. The display time + 4 msec display time is set (step Y662). By setting the display time of the special figure 2 + the display time of 4 msec as the display time of the special figure 1, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 end at the same time. Even if the special figure 1 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started. This resetting extends the stop display time, but may shorten it in some cases.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y663), and the decorative special figure 1 off-design command is set and prepared (step Y664). Then, the symbol command is saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y665), and the effect command setting process (step Y666) is performed. After that, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), the effect command setting process (step Y668) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y669) is performed.

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y673), and whether the special figure 2 is a small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. Determine (step Y674). In the case of a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. Also, if it is not a special figure 2 small hit (
Step Y674; N), that is, in the case of a big hit, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y675).
Special figure 2 Load information from the large winning opening opening information area and save it in the large winning opening opening information area (
Step Y676). After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area, saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y677), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y678) is performed to perform the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y678). Ends the process being displayed.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
FIG. 67 shows the process during display of the special figure 1 in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process (step Y111).
showed that. In this special figure 1 display process, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y7).
51), clear the jackpot flag 1 area (step Y752). Then, the special figure 1 determines whether the jackpot is a jackpot, that is, whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is jackpot information (step Y753).
, When the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y753; Y), a test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, a special symbol) relating to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the special figure 1 variation display game is turned on. (1 signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y754).
..

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y755), and the effect command setting process (step Y756) is performed.
I do. After that, the fanfare command is prepared (step Y757), and the effect command setting process (step Y758) is performed.
Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure variation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y759). In the case of this embodiment
Two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 100 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information
Is set (step Y760), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y761). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y762), and the game is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y763). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y764) is performed to perform the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y764).
Special Figure 1 Displaying Processing ends.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y753; N), that is, the big hit flag 1
If the information is out of order, it is determined whether it is a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y765), and if it is not a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y765; N), it is determined whether it is a time-reduced final fluctuation (step Y766). .. Here, when the fall lottery for the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability. Further, when the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined that the time is shortened and the final variation is made.

Then, if it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y765; N) and if it is not a time-reduced final variation (step Y766; N), the process proceeds to step Y774. Further, in the case of a high probability final variation (step Y765; Y) or a time reduction final variation (step Y766; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y767), and an effect command is provided. The setting process (step Y768) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y769), the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y770), and the small hit in Special Figure 2 is in progress, that is, Special Figure 2 It is determined whether or not the player is in a special gaming state to be executed based on the result of the variable display game being a small hit (step Y771).

If the small hit in FIG. 2 is in progress (step Y771; Y), the process proceeds to step Y774. On the other hand, when the small hit in FIG. 2 is not in progress (step Y771; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y772). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y773). As a result, the first game status display unit 5
6 is turned off, and a display instructing left-handed strike is displayed. After that, the special figure 1 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y774), the special figure 1 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y775), and the special figure 1 is Ends the process being displayed.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
68 and 69 show the process during display of the special figure 2 (step Y144) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. The special figure 2 display process is the same process as the special figure 1 display process described above for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is loaded. Clear two areas (step Y812).

Next, the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 region is loaded (step Y813) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, and the jackpot flag 2 region is cleared (step Y814). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is the big hit information (step Y815), and when the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y815; Y), the special figure 2 variation display game. The test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON and the special symbol 2 hit signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Next, the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y817), and the effect command setting process (step Y818) is performed.
I do. After that, the fanfare command is prepared (step Y819), and the effect command setting process (step Y820) is performed.
Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure variation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y821). In the case of this embodiment
Two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 100 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information
Is set (step Y822), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y823). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y824), and the game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y825). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y826) is performed to perform the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing.
Special Figure 2 Displaying Processing ends.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, the big hit flag 2
If the information is out of order, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information) (step Y827). Then, when the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y8).
In 27; Y), it is determined whether it is a high-probability final variation (step Y828), and when it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y828; N), it is determined whether it is a time-reduced final variation (step Y829). Here, when the fall lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability. Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined that the time is shortened and the final variation is made.

Then, if it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y828; N) and if it is not a time-reduced final variation (step Y829; N), the process proceeds to step Y834. Further, in the case of a high probability final variation (step Y828; Y) or a time reduction final variation (step Y829; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y830), and an effect command is provided. The setting process (step Y831) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y832), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y833).
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of a small hit, but the player is not aware of the occurrence of the small hit. In order to do so, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.

Next, the command is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y834), and the command is prepared.
The effect command setting process (step Y835) is performed. Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y836), an effect command setting process (step Y837) is performed, and a signal related to a right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y838).
). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y839). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned on, and a display instructing a right-handed strike is made.
After that, the area of the number of illegal winnings of the lower prize opening is cleared (step Y840), the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the area of the flag area of the illegal monitoring period of the lower winning opening (step Y841), and the special figure 2
The small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step Y857) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process is terminated.

If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y827; N), it is determined whether it is a high-probability final variation (step Y843), and if it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y84).
In 3; N), it is determined whether or not the time is the final variation (step Y844). Here, when the fall lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability. In addition, the running special figure 2 variable display game has been played 100 times since the end of the special game state (
(Number of times of support) In the case of the special figure fluctuation display game of the eye, it is determined that the time is shortened and the final fluctuation is made.

Then, if it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y843; N) and if it is not a time-reduced final variation (step Y844; N), the process proceeds to step Y850. Further, in the case of a high probability final variation (step Y843; Y) or a time reduction final variation (step Y844; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y845), and an effect command is provided. The setting process (step Y846) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y847), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned off, and a display instructing a left-handed strike is made. After that, the special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y850), the special figure 2 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y851), and the special figure 2 is Ends the process being displayed.

That is, the game control device 100 generates a first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the operation of the condition device based on the first special result of the variable display game. A second special game generating means for generating a second special gaming state in which the special variable winning device is opened without operating the condition device based on the second special result of the variable display game as well as the means. Eggplant.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
70 and 71 show fanfare / interval processing (steps Y112, Y145) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y941), and if the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step Y941; N), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y941; Y), it is determined whether it is the first round (step Y942).

If it is not the first round (step Y942; N), the process proceeds to step Y950. On the other hand, in the case of the first round (step Y942; Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 (step Y943). Here, in the present embodiment, the special game state is started by the game ball passing through the normal drawing start gate 34 after the big hit (first special result) is derived in the special figure variation display game. There is.

If the game ball does not pass through the normal drawing start gate 34 (step Y943; N), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 (step Y943; Y), the round number upper limit value table is set (step Y944), and the round number upper limit corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is set. The value (10 in the case of the present embodiment) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area (step Y945). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y946).

Next, the area for the number of illegal winnings of the upper prize opening is cleared (step Y947), and the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the area for the illegal monitoring period of the upper winning opening (step Y948). After that, the on-output data of the signal during operation of the accessory continuous operation device is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y949), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step Y950).
.. Then, the round command corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is prepared (step Y951), and the effect command setting process (step Y952) is performed.

Next, the initial value of the jackpot processing control pointer corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y953), the pointer initial value is saved in the jackpot processing control pointer area (step Y954), and the jackpot prize is won. The large winning opening time corresponding to the opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y955). The initial value of the processing control pointer during the jackpot is set to 0 when opening and closing are repeated in one round. In this embodiment, a long opening with V corresponds to this. In addition, when opening once in one round, the jackpot operation end value (
In the case of this embodiment, 2) is set. The initial value may be set to a value other than 0 according to the number of times of opening and closing in one round.

Next, it is determined whether the lever solenoid operation round is reached (step Y956). The lever solenoid operation round is a round in which the lever solenoid 38f is operated to operate the lever member, and in the case of the present embodiment, it is only a specific round of the first round. Then, in the case of the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; Y), the operation data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y957). As a result, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area, and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared. On the other hand, when it is not the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; N),
The stop data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y958).

After that, 4 is set as the processing number (step Y959), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y960). Then, in the case of a big hit in Special Figure 1 (step Y960;
In Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y961), and the large winning opening opening time is saved in the special drawing 1 game processing timer area (step Y962). on the other hand,
If it is not the big hit of special figure 1 (step Y960; N), that is, if it is the big hit of special figure 2, the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y963), and the big winning opening opening time is set. Special Figure 2 Save to the game processing timer area (step Y964).

Then, the signal related to the opening start of the upper prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (
Step Y965). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Next, the first
In order to open the opening / closing member of the special variable winning device 38, the upper winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y966), and the number of winnings to the large winning opening is counted. (Step Y967) to end the fanfare / interval processing.

In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, in the special gaming state based on the jackpot (first special gaming state), only the upper prize winning opening (first special variable device 38) is opened.
In the special gaming state based on the small hit (second special gaming state), only the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is opened, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the opening / closing mode in the first special game state may be such that the upper prize opening is open in the first round and the lower prize opening is open in the second and subsequent rounds.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 72 shows the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y11) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.
5) is shown. In this special figure 1 jackpot end process, first, a subroutine call is performed based on the time reduction determination data (step Y1101). If the time reduction determination data has no time reduction in step Y1101, the jackpot end setting process 1 (step Y1102) is performed, and if the time reduction determination data has time reduction in step Y1101, the jackpot end setting process 2 (step Y1102) is performed. Step Y1103) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is information passing through the specific area (step Y1104). In the present embodiment, when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operation area), the specific area passage flag is set.
When this specific area passage flag is set, it is determined that there is specific area passage information. If there is no specific area passage information (step Y1104; N), the process proceeds to step Y1106. On the other hand, when there is specific area passage information (step Y1104; Y), the jackpot end setting process 3 (step Y1105) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1106), and the game ball to the specific area (probability variation operation area) in the special game state based on the normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment). (Step Y1107).

If the passage is not irregular in the specific region (step Y1107; N), step Y1
Move to 109. On the other hand, when the passage is irregular in a specific region (step Y1107;
In Y), the irregular probability variation information is added to the probability information command (step Y1108).
), The effect command setting process (step Y1109) is performed. By the process of step Y1109, the probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands in which the production mode information is included in any of "high probability / time saving", "low probability / time saving", and "low probability / no time saving". Yes, in the case of irregular passage in the probability variation operation area, irregular probability variation information is added.

Next, "0" related to the special figure 1 normal processing is set as the processing number (step Y1110), and the processing number is set.
The processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1111). Next, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1112).
Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1113). here,
Condition device operating signal, accessory continuous operating device operating signal, special symbol 1 hit signal and special symbol 2
Set the hit signal to OFF.

Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1114), and the light is turned off.
Save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the upper prize opening (step Y1)
115), clear the special figure status area (step Y1116). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. And special figure 2 game weight time value (
For example, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1117), and the special figure 1 big hit end process is completed.

By performing this special figure 1 jackpot end processing, it is possible to start the special figure variation display game for both special figure 1 and special figure 2, but in the timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game is performed after the special figure 1 game processing. In order to perform the processing, the processing to start the special figure variation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game processing by the timer interrupt that has performed the special figure 1 big hit end processing, and the special figure 2 variation display game is performed rather than the special figure 1 variation display game. Can be started earlier. Therefore, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step Y1117,
The start process of the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt process, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.
That is, the second variable display game execution control means is the first until the game control device 100 can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game after the end of the special game state. (2) A game processing standby means for preventing the processing related to the start of the variable display game from being in an executable state.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 73 shows the special figure 2 jackpot end process (step Y14) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process.
8) was shown. The special figure 2 big hit end process is the step Y110 in the above-mentioned special figure 1 big hit process.
The process is the same except that 9 is not performed. In this special figure 2 big hit end process, first, a subroutine call is performed based on the time reduction determination data (step Y1131). Step Y113
If the time reduction determination data in 1 is no time reduction, the jackpot end setting process 1 (step Y1)
132) is performed, and if the time reduction determination data has a time reduction in step Y1131, the jackpot end setting process 2 (step Y1133) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passage information (step Y1134), and if there is no specific area passage information (step Y1134; N), the process proceeds to step Y1136. On the other hand, when there is specific area passage information (step Y1134; Y), the jackpot end setting process 3 (step Y1135) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1136), and the game ball to the specific area (probability variation operation area) in the special game state based on the normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment). It is determined whether or not the passage is irregular in a specific region, which is the inflow of

If the passage is not irregular in a specific area (step Y1137; N), step Y1
Move to 139. On the other hand, when the passage is irregular in a specific area (step Y1137;
In Y), add irregular probability change information to the probability information command (step Y1138).
), The effect command setting process (step Y1139) is performed. By the process of step Y1139, the probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands in which the production mode information is included in any of "high probability / time saving", "low probability / time saving", and "low probability / no time saving". Yes, in the case of irregular passage in the probability variation operation area, irregular probability variation information is added.

Next, "0" related to the special figure 2 normal processing is set as the processing number (step Y1140), and the processing number is set.
The processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1141). Next, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1143).
Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1143). here,
Condition device operating signal, accessory continuous operating device operating signal, special symbol 1 hit signal and special symbol 2
Set the hit signal to OFF.

Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1144), and the light is turned off.
Save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the upper prize opening (step Y11)
45), the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1146), and the special figure 2 jackpot end process is completed. By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 74A shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (steps Y1102, 1132) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, the signal relating to the start without shortening the time is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1151). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to OFF. At this point, only the data is set and no output is made.

Next, the signal relating to the start without time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1152). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the ordinary electric accessory 1 Set the open extension status signal to OFF.
After that, the number without time reduction is saved in the game status display number area (step Y1153), and the number is saved.
Save the normal time reduction flag in the normal game mode flag area (step Y1154).
.. Next, the special figure low probability and no time reduction flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1155), and the time reduction fluctuation number area for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the time reduction state is set to 0. Clear (step Y1156).

Next, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1).
157). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Next, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1158). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned off, and a display instructing a left-handed strike is made. After that, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1159), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated. By this process, it becomes a normal game state.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 74 (b) shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (steps Y1103, 1133) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, the signal related to the start of the time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1).
161). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, the signal relating to the start with a short time is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1162). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the ordinary electric accessory 1 Set the open extension status signal to ON.
After that, the number with the time saving is saved in the game status display number area (step Y1163), and the number is saved.
Save the flag with a short time in the normal map game mode flag area (step Y1164)
.. Next, the special figure low probability and time saving flags are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1165), and the initial time saving fluctuation number area for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the time saving state is initially set. Save the value (step Y1166). In the case of this embodiment, since the number of times of support is 100, 100 is saved as an initial value in step Y1166.

Then, the probability information command (time reduction) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1167), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated. By this processing, it becomes the second specific game state with a low probability of special figure. In the case of this embodiment, the right-handed mode is used during the time saving state.
Since the right-handed mode is set from the big hit, the right-handed setting is not performed in the big hit end setting process 2.

[Big hit end setting process 3]
FIG. 75 shows the jackpot end setting process 3 (steps Y1105 and Y1135) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In the jackpot end setting process 3, first, the signal related to the start of the special figure time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1).
171). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, save the signal related to the start with high probability & time saving in the test signal output data area (
Step Y1172). Here, the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are set to ON. After that, the number with the time reduction is saved in the game status display number area (step Y1173).
), Save the special figure high probability and time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1174).

Next, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1).
175). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the game status display number 2
The number in the right-handed state is saved in the area (step Y1176). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned on, and a display instructing a right-handed strike is made. After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1177), and the jackpot end setting process 3 is terminated. This process results in a high probability state. That is, by executing the jackpot end setting process 3 after the jackpot end setting process 1, the first specific game state is established.
By executing the jackpot end setting process 3 after the jackpot end setting process 2, the second with a high probability of special figure
It becomes a specific game state.
By the above processing, it is possible to set a specific gaming state which is a high probability state after the end of the first special gaming state. That is, the game control device 100 increases the probability that the result of the special variation display game becomes a special result higher than the normal state (first specific game state ST2, special figure high probability second specific game state ST3). Is a means for generating a specific game state that can generate.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing]
FIG. 76 shows the small hit fanfare middle process (step Y149) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In this small hit fanfare middle process, first, a small hit opening command for opening the lower prize opening is prepared (step Y1201), and an effect command setting process (step Y1202) is performed. Next, 8 related to the small hit medium processing is set as the processing number (step Y1203), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1204).
).

Next, the small hit opening time (for example, 1600 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1205), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation (the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is turned on) is a test signal. Save to the output data area (step Y1206). and,
Save the lower prize opening on-data in the grand prize opening solenoid output data area (step Y12)
07), the large winning opening count area for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening is cleared (step Y1208), and the processing during the small hit fanfare is completed.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 77 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y15) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process.
2) was shown. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 related to the special figure 2 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y).
1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1335), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1335). Step Y1336). By clearing the special figure status area
The special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (during a normal game state) (step Y133).
7) In the case of low probability of special figure & no time reduction (step Y1337; N), step Y
Move to 1340. In addition, when the special figure has a low probability and there is no time reduction (step Y1337;
In Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y).
1338). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1339), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (step Y1340).

Then, when the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (step Y1340; N),
The special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is completed. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (step Y1340; Y).
), The decoration special figure 1 restart command is prepared (step Y1341), and the effect command setting process (step Y1342) is performed. After that, clear the special figure 1 game interruption flag area (
Step Y1343), special figure 2 small hit end processing is completed. As a result, the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted with the end of the special gaming state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game.

That is, the game control device 100 is the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 1).
When the execution control of one of the variable display game execution control means is performed by one of the variable display game execution control means (00) and the second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100).
When the other variable display game whose execution is controlled by the other variable display game execution control means has a special result, one variable display game is interrupted and the special gaming state based on the other variable display game is changed. It serves as a restart control means capable of executing restart control for restarting one of the variable display games that was interrupted after the game was finished.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs the main process shown in FIG. 78 and the timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 78, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, interrupts are first disabled (step C1), and the CPU is initially set (step C2). Next, the initial setting of VDP312 is performed (step C3), and interrupts are enabled (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C).
5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure detection detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, an input signal based on the operation of the effect button 25 and the cross key 29 (
The effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from the rising edge) is performed. The input from the effect button 25 and the cross key 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the cross key 29, the effect content is changed. ..

Then, the setting of the changeable range such as the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal, and the LED by the player
The hall / player setting mode processing that accepts operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the liquid crystal and the liquid crystal is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, the reception command check process (step C12) that analyzes the command from the game control device 100 and responds to it is performed, and the effect display editing process (step C13) that edits the setting and drawing command for controlling the progress of the effect. ) To set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (about 33.3 msec) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, a V blank interrupt (1/6) is used to create a system cycle (1/30 second per frame).
When 0 seconds) is entered twice, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached. The frame switching timing can be changed as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) that controls the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process that controls LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 (step). C18), a panel that performs a movable body control process (step C19) that controls the motor, solenoid, and reel 6 of the panel effect device 44, and controls the effect by the notification unit 72, the point notification unit 73, the cumulative value notification unit 74, and the like. The effect setting process (step C20) is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 79 shows the received command check process in the above-mentioned main process. In this received command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (1/30 second).
Step C201), it is determined whether or not the number of command receptions is 0 (step C202).
.. Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of command receptions (step C203).

Then, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204).
), The command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not the copy of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C206).
As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not analyzed directly in the received command buffer.
The contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. As a result, the command (data) is prepared in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command.
Can be moved to make space. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in units of one main process.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copy of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that the copying of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C210; N),
The process returns to step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, the commands received in one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 80 shows the received command analysis process in the above-mentioned received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether the MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). MODE and A
When CT is determined to be in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y)
To determine if the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (step C23).
4).

Further, when it is determined in step C232 and step C233 that the MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in the step C234 that the ACT for the MODE is not the correct combination (step C232; N, step C233; N). C2
34; N) ends the received command analysis process.

When it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (
In step C234; Y), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of variable commands (step C235). The variable command is a command that commands the variable pattern of the special figure. Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235).
In Y), a variable command process (step C236) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, in step C235, when it is determined that MODE is not within the range of the variable command (
In step C235; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of jackpot commands (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation related to a big hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for an operation related to a small hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen, an end screen, etc.). And MO
When it is determined that the DE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command process (step C238) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, in step C237, when it is determined that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the symbol command (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for commanding information about the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command (step C239; Y), the symbol-based command processing (step C239; Y) is performed.
Step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, in step C239, when it is determined that MODE is not within the range of the symbol command (
In step C239; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of one-shot commands such as a hold number command and an error command (step C241). Single-shot commands are commands that are established independently, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands. This one-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold count command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / invalid command, a model specification command, and the like. Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of one-shot commands (step C24).
In 1; Y), a one-shot command process (step C242) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of one-shot commands (
In step C241; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol-based command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol-based command processing (step C2)
44) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) is performed to end the received command analysis process. Also, in step C245,
When it is determined that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; N)
Ends the received command analysis process.

The look-ahead variable command and the look-ahead symbol command are commands that include information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect (also called look-ahead notice or look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not the special figure change display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) becomes a big hit when the special figure change display game is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) with a predetermined reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display or the like to be displayed on the display device 41 may be performed in a mode different from the usual mode, or the display device 41 may be displayed. It is a production such as performing a production display on. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance of the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is from the game control device 100 at the time of winning a start. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

<Look-ahead production>
The effect control device 300 can execute a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display as a look-ahead effect.
FIG. 81 shows an example of the pending change effect. First, a predetermined gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state S)
The display on the display device 41 in T1) will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 81A, a decorative special figure variation display game display unit 81 for displaying a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the main variation is provided in the central portion of the display area of the display device 41. The decorative special figure variation display game display unit 81 displays the decorative special figure variation display game by displaying the decoration identification information in a variable manner in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas and then stopping and displaying the display.

At the lower part of the display area of the display device 41, a waiting hold display unit 82 for displaying the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the undigested start memory is provided. The decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the standby hold display unit 82 has a one-to-one correspondence with the start memory corresponding to the main variation, and is displayed side by side in the memory order. It shows that there are three start memories corresponding to the main fluctuation. The decorative special figure start memory display at the left end is the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory stored first, and shifts to the left each time it is digested. also,
In the waiting hold display unit 82, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure variation display game corresponding to each start memory and the look-ahead result such as the variation pattern by the display mode.

On the left side of the waiting hold display unit 82, an executing hold display unit 83 for displaying information related to the start memory corresponding to the currently executing special figure variation display game is provided. At the start of the main fluctuation, the decorative special figure start storage display at the left end of the waiting hold display unit 82 is transferred to the execution hold display unit 83. In addition, the execution hold display unit 83 can suggest the result of the main fluctuation to be executed, the fluctuation pattern, and the like by the display mode.

The effect control device 300 executes an operation promotion effect that urges the player to operate the effect button 25 before executing the hold change effect. In the operation promotion effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 81B, the display position of the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 81 moves to the upper right portion of the display area of the display device 41, and is centered on the display area of the display device 41. An effect button image 84a imitating the effect button 25 and a notification image 84b (for example, a time bar image) for notifying the remaining length of the operation valid period are provided in the unit.
And the operation promotion image 84 including the designated image 84c (for example, a character image such as "press!" Or "three consecutive hits!") That specifies the operation mode of the effect button 25 is displayed.

Then, the effect control device 300 has the effect button 25 in the operation mode designated during the operation valid period.
While the hold change effect is executed when is operated, the hold change effect is not executed when the effect button 25 is not operated in the designated operation mode during the operation valid period. In the hold change effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 81 (c), among the decoration special figure start memory displays displayed on the standby hold display unit 82, the decoration feature corresponding to the start memory that is the target of the hold change effect. The display mode (for example, color) of the start memory display changes from the normal display mode (for example, white) to the specific display mode (for example, red or blue).

In the present embodiment, the colors of the decorative special figure start memory display are such that the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit (or the degree of expectation of becoming a predetermined fluctuation pattern)) increases in the order of white <blue <red. ..
Hereinafter, the red decorative special figure start memory display will be referred to as "red hold", and the blue decorative special figure start memory display will be referred to as "blue hold".
The display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display that changes due to the hold change effect is not limited to the color of the decorative special figure start memory display. That is, in the hold change effect, the color of the decorative special figure start memory display may change, the shape of the decorative special figure start memory display may change, and the size of the decorative special figure start memory display changes. Alternatively, at least two of the colors, shapes, and sizes of the decorative special drawing start memory display may be changed.
Further, when the effect button 25 is not operated in the designated operation mode during the operation valid period, the hold change effect may be executed after the end of the operation valid period.
Further, the hold change effect may be executed without executing the operation promotion effect.

<Reach production>
The effect control device 300 has a normal reach effect and a weak SP reach effect (for example, a special 1 reach effect) that is expected to be a big hit than the normal reach effect.
And, it is possible to execute a strong SP reach production (for example, a special 3 reach production), which has a higher expectation of becoming a big hit than a weak SP reach production.
For example, in the variable command process (step C236) of the received command analysis process (FIG. 80), the effect control device 300 sets information for performing an effect according to the variable command from the game control device 100. Specifically, when the variable system command from the game control device 100 is a variable system command including information on a variable pattern for executing the reach effect, information for performing the reach effect is set. As a result, the reach effect is executed in the special figure variation display game to be started from now on.

Here, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect includes, at least, a variation pattern ending in the normal reach effect, a variation pattern ending in the weak SP reach effect, and a variation pattern ending in the strong SP reach effect.
Further, the variation patterns ending in the weak SP reach effect include, at least, a pattern in which the weak SP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed, and a pattern in which the weak SP reach effect is suddenly executed without executing the normal reach effect. ..
Further, the fluctuation patterns ending in the strong SP reach effect include at least pattern A, pattern B, pattern C, and pattern D.

In pattern A, a weak SP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed, and the weak SP is executed.
This is a pattern in which a strong SP reach effect is executed after the reach effect is executed.
FIG. 82 shows an example of pattern A. For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (a), when the special figure variation display game ends, the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the running hold display unit 83 disappears.
Next, when the next special figure variation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), the decorative special figure start storage display at the left end of the waiting hold display unit 82 shifts to the running hold display unit 83. The display is done. Here, the execution hold display unit 83 also suggests the result of the special figure variation display game, the variation pattern, and the like in the same manner as the look-ahead effect. Further, in the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 81, the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is started, and the variation display of the decoration identification information is displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas. It will be started.

When the special figure variation display game is a special figure variation display game that executes a strong SP reach effect of pattern A, the normal reach effect starts when the first half variation ends, for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (c). In addition, the same decoration identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area of the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 81. In the temporarily stopped state, the decorative identification information is displayed in a swaying manner, indicating that the decoration is not completely stopped.
Next, it develops into a weak SP reach effect, and as shown in FIGS. It is in a state of being moved to the left corner and the right corner, and an effect by a development symbol or the like is displayed in the center of the display area.

Next, it develops into a strong SP reach effect, and as shown in FIGS. The effect by the character or the like is displayed in the center of the display area while moving to the left corner and the right corner.
Then, when the latter half variation ends, for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (h), the result of the special figure variation display game is displayed on the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 81, and the special figure variation display game ends. do.

Further, the pattern B is a pattern in which the strong SP reach effect is executed without executing the weak SP reach effect after the execution of the normal reach effect.
FIG. 83 shows an example of pattern B. 83 is different from FIG. 82 only in that there are no FIGS. 82 (d) and 82 (e), and the other points are the same as those in FIG. 82. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the pattern C is a pattern in which the strong SP reach effect is suddenly executed without executing the normal reach effect and the weak SP reach effect.
FIG. 84 shows an example of pattern C. 84 is different from FIG. 82 only in that there is no FIG. 82 (c), (d), and (e), and the other points are the same as those in FIG. 82. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the pattern D is a pattern in which a strong SP reach effect is executed after executing a pseudo-continuous effect in which the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle of the special figure variation display game and then the revariation effect is displayed one or more times. be. In pattern D, the normal reach effect and the weak SP reach effect are not executed.
FIG. 85 shows an example of pattern D. For example, as shown in FIG. 85A, when the special figure variation display game ends, the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the running hold display unit 83 disappears.
Next, when the next special figure variation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the decorative special figure start storage display at the left end of the waiting hold display unit 82 shifts to the running hold display unit 83. The display is done. Here, the execution hold display unit 83 also suggests the result of the special figure variation display game, the variation pattern, and the like in the same manner as the look-ahead effect. Further, in the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 81, the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is started, and the variation display of the decoration identification information is displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas. It will be started.

Then, in the case where the special figure variation display game is a special figure variation display game that executes the strong SP reach effect of the pattern D, the pseudo continuous effect starts when the first half variation ends, for example, FIG. 85 (
As shown in c), after the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 81 in a result mode other than the winning result mode, for example, FIG. 85. (D)
As shown in the above, the re-variable display of the decorative identification information is started in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 81.
Next, it develops into a strong SP reach effect, and as shown in FIGS. It is in a state of being moved to the left corner and the right corner, and an effect by a character or the like is displayed in the center of the display area.
Then, when the latter half variation ends, for example, as shown in FIG. 85 (g), the result of the special figure variation display game is displayed on the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 81, and the special figure variation display game ends. do.

The fluctuation pattern ending in the above-mentioned normal reach effect is, for example, FIG. 82 (a).
→ (b) → (c) → (h).
Further, among the fluctuation patterns ending in the weak SP reach effect described above, the pattern in which the weak SP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed is, for example, FIG. 82 (a) → (b) → (
c) → (d) → (e) → (h).
Further, among the fluctuation patterns ending in the weak SP reach effect described above, a pattern in which the weak SP reach effect is suddenly executed without executing the normal reach effect is, for example, FIG. 82 (a) →
It is a pattern of (b) → (d) → (e) → (h).

Further, FIG. 85 shows a pseudo-continuous effect in which the number of times of the re-variation effect (the effect of temporarily stopping and displaying the decoration identification information and then displaying the re-variation) is one, but the re-variation to be executed in the pseudo-continuous effect is shown. The number of productions may be multiple.
Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 82 to 85, the execution hold display unit 83 also suggests the result of the special figure variation display game, the variation pattern, and the like in the same manner as the look-ahead effect. In particular,
Decorative special figure start memory display in a specific display mode (red hold (decorative special figure start memory display with diagonal hatching in the figure) and blue hold (decorative special figure start memory display with polka dot hatching in the figure)) , The standby display unit 82 has been transferred to the running hold display unit 83. That is, FIGS. 82 to 85 illustrate the case where the reach effect is executed in the special figure variation display game that is the target of the hold change effect, but of course, the special figure variation display game that is not the target of the hold change effect. It is also possible to perform a reach effect in.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 82 to 85, the effect mode of the normal reach effect (FIG. 82 (c)) executed when the pattern A is set and the effect of the normal reach effect executed when the pattern B is set. Although the aspect (FIG. 83 (c)) is the same, the effect mode of the normal reach effect may be different between the pattern A and the pattern B.
Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 82 to 85, when the pattern A is set, the effect mode of the strong SP reach effect (FIGS. 82 (f) and (g)) and the pattern B are set. The effect mode of the strong SP reach effect to be executed (FIGS. 83 (d), (e)) and the effect mode of the strong SP reach effect to be executed when the pattern C is set (FIGS. 84 (c), (d)). And the effect mode (FIGS. 85 (e) and (f)) of the strong SP reach effect executed when the pattern D is set are the same, but the pattern A, the pattern B, the pattern C, and the pattern D are the same. The production mode of the strong SP reach effect may be different.

Here, the fluctuation pattern that ends with the strong SP reach effect will be described.
In the present embodiment, at least pattern A (normal → weak SP → strong SP), pattern B (normal → strong SP), pattern C (strong SP), and pattern D (pseudo) are used as fluctuation patterns ending in the strong SP reach effect. Four fluctuation patterns of continuous → strong SP) are prepared.
Then, in the special figure variation display game that is the target of the hold change effect that changes to red hold, pattern C is easier to select than pattern A, pattern D is easier to select than pattern C, and patterns A to D. Among them, pattern B is most likely to be selected.

Further, in the special figure variation display game that is the target of the hold change effect that changes to the blue hold, which has a lower expectation than the red hold, the pattern A is more likely to be selected than the pattern C, and the pattern C is selected rather than the pattern D. Pattern B is most likely to be selected among patterns A to D.
That is, the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit is pattern B <pattern A <pattern C <pattern D.
Higher in order.

When the start memory is generated, the game control device 100 transmits a look-ahead command related to the start memory to the effect control device 300. The look-ahead command includes information on the fluctuation pattern and information on the stop symbol corresponding to the start memory of the read-ahead target. This fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table.
Further, the game control device 100 issues a variable system command at the start of the variable display, and the game control device 30 produces a variable system command.
Send to 0. The variable command includes information on the variable pattern corresponding to the start memory of the variable target. This fluctuation pattern is also determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table.

FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b) show a part of the variation pattern table. The table shown in FIG. 86A is an example of an out-of-order variation pattern table for the special figure 1 variation display game, and the type and selection rate of the variation pattern in the normal game state ST1 are defined. In addition, FIG. 86 (b)
) Is an example of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the type and selection rate of the fluctuation pattern in the normal game state ST1 are defined.

That is, in the present embodiment, in the game control device 100, the current game state is the normal game state ST1, and the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target is the special figure 1 variation display game. 1 When the result of the variable display game is out of order, for example, FIG. 86 (
The fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table shown in a), and a look-ahead command including the fluctuation pattern information is transmitted to the effect control device 300.
Further, in the game control device 100, the current game state is the normal game state ST1, the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target is the special figure 1 variation display game, and the special figure 1 variation display game. When the result is a big hit, for example, the fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 86B, and a look-ahead command including the information of the fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Further, in the game control device 100, the current game state is the normal game state ST1, the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the change target is the special figure 1 change display game, and the special figure 1 change display game. When the result is out of order, for example, the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 86A, and the fluctuation system command including the information of the fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the effect control device 300.
Further, in the game control device 100, the current game state is the normal game state ST1, the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the change target is the special figure 1 change display game, and the special figure 1 change display game. When the result is a big hit, for example, the fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 86B, and the fluctuation system command including the information of the fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

For example, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target is out of order, the pattern D is among the variation patterns ending with the strong SP reach effect.
(Pseudo-ream → strong SP) is the most difficult to select, pattern C (strong SP) is more difficult to select than pattern A (normal → weak SP → strong SP), and pattern B (normal → strong SP) is most likely to be selected. It has become. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), when the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target is a big hit, the selection rates of the patterns A to D are the same. That is, the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit is pattern B <pattern A <pattern C.
<The order is higher in the order of pattern D.
In the example shown in FIG. 86 (b), the variation pattern without reach can be selected even in the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit, but there is no reach in the special figure variation display game in which the result is a jackpot. It may be configured so that the fluctuation pattern cannot be selected.

When the effect control device 300 receives a look-ahead command from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 receives a look-ahead command.
For example, pre-reading variable command processing (step C246) of the received command analysis processing (FIG. 80).
), A hold change effect lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the hold change effect and the effect mode of the hold change effect. This hold change effect lottery is performed with reference to, for example, the hold change effect distribution table.
FIG. 86 (c) shows a part of the pending change effect distribution table. The table shown in FIG. 86 (c) is an example of a pending change effect distribution table for a special figure 1 variation display game, which is referred to when a look-ahead command including information on a variation pattern ending in a strong SP reach effect is received. And
The effect mode and selection rate of the hold change effect in the normal game state ST1 are defined. note that,
When a look-ahead command including information on a variation pattern ending in the strong SP reach effect is received, a common hold change effect distribution table is used regardless of the stop symbol information included in the look-ahead command.

That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 is a look-ahead command that includes information on a variation pattern in which the current game state is the normal game state ST1 and the received look-ahead command ends with a strong SP reach effect. When the special figure variable display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target is the special figure 1 variable display game, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game may be out of order or a big hit, for example, the figure. The hold change effect lottery is performed with reference to the hold change effect distribution table shown in 86 (c).
Then, when the "first effect mode" is selected in the hold change effect lottery, the hold change effect that changes the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the look-ahead target to red hold is executed. Further, when the "second effect mode" is selected in the hold change effect lottery, the hold change effect for changing the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the look-ahead target to blue hold is executed. Further, when "non-execution" is selected in the hold change effect lottery, the hold change effect that changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the look-ahead target is not executed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 86 (c), when a look-ahead command including the information of the pattern A is received as the variation pattern ending in the strong SP reach effect, the "first effect mode" is most difficult to select, and ""Non-execution" is the easiest to select.
In this embodiment, when a look-ahead command including information on a fluctuation pattern ending in a strong SP reach effect is received, a common hold change effect distribution is performed regardless of the result of the special figure variation display game to be read ahead. Although the table (Fig. 86 (c)) is used, it is possible to use a different pending change effect distribution table depending on whether the result of the special figure variation display game to be read ahead is a big hit or not. good.

FIG. 86 (d) shows the relationship between the effect mode of the hold change effect and the effect mode of the strong SP reach effect, which are derived from FIGS. 86 (a), (b) and 86 (c).
For example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b), the strong SP transmitted from the game control device 100
Of the look-ahead commands that include information on the variable pattern that ends in the reach effect, about 30% are look-ahead commands that include pattern A information, and about 40% are look-ahead commands that include pattern B information. 20% are look-ahead commands that include pattern C information, about 1
0% is a look-ahead command that includes pattern D information.

Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (c), when a look-ahead command including the information of the pattern A is received, the "first effect mode" is selected at a ratio of 4/30, and a ratio of 6/30. "Second effect mode" is selected in, and "non-execution" is selected at a ratio of 20/30. That is,
Of the look-ahead commands including the information of the fluctuation pattern ending in the strong SP reach effect transmitted from the game control device 100, about 4% are the look-ahead commands including the information of the pattern A, and the "first effect mode" is It is a look-ahead command that is selected, about 6% is a look-ahead command that includes pattern A information, and is a look-ahead command that selects the "second effect mode", and about 20% is a look-ahead command that contains pattern A information. This is a look-ahead command that includes a look-ahead command for which "non-execution" is selected.

Therefore, if there is no change in the game state or the like between the time of transmitting the look-ahead command and the time of transmitting the variable command, for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (d), it is the target of the hold change effect that changes to red hold. In the special figure fluctuation display game, in the strong SP reach production, the strong S of pattern B
The P reach effect is most easily executed, the strong SP reach effect of pattern C is easier to execute than the strong SP reach effect of pattern A, and the strong SP reach effect of pattern D is easier to execute than the strong SP reach effect of pattern C. It has become.
In addition, in the special figure fluctuation display game targeted for the hold change effect that changes to blue hold,
Among the strong SP reach effects, the strong SP reach effect of pattern B is most easily executed, the strong SP reach effect of pattern A is easier to execute than the strong SP reach effect of pattern C, and the strong SP reach effect of pattern D is more likely to be executed. Also, the strong SP reach effect of pattern C is easy to be executed.

That is, before the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game in which the fluctuation pattern ending in the strong SP reach effect is set, the look-ahead effect for the special figure variation display game is changed to red hold, which has a higher expectation than blue hold. When the pending change effect is performed, as the strong SP reach effect, of the strong SP reach effect of pattern A and the strong SP reach effect of pattern C, the strong SP reach effect of pattern C, which has a higher expectation, is used. Of the pattern C strong SP reach effect and the pattern D strong SP reach effect, the pattern D strong SP reach effect, which has a higher degree of expectation, is easier to execute.

In addition, before executing the special figure fluctuation display game in which the fluctuation pattern ending with the strong SP reach effect is set, the look-ahead effect for the special figure variation display game is changed to blue hold, which is less expected than red hold. When the pending change effect is performed, as the strong SP reach effect, of the strong SP reach effect of pattern A and the strong SP reach effect of pattern C, the strong SP reach effect of pattern A, which has a lower expectation, is used. Of the strong SP reach effect of pattern C and the strong SP reach effect of pattern D, the strong SP reach effect of pattern C, which has a lower expectation, is easier to execute.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the production of the advance notice production (look-ahead production) performed before the strong SP reach production according to the production mode of the strong SP reach production (the process until the development into the strong SP reach production). The modes can be sorted.

As a look-ahead effect, when a hold change effect that changes to red hold is performed, there is a higher expectation that a strong SP reach effect will be executed than if a hold change effect that changes to blue hold is performed. .. Therefore, when the hold change effect that changes to red hold is performed, if the strong SP reach effect of pattern A that goes through the normal reach and the weak SP reach is executed, a feeling of delay or boredom will occur, and the interest of the reach effect will be reduced. There is a risk of doing so. On the other hand, in this embodiment,
When a hold change effect that changes to red hold is performed, the strong SP reach effect of pattern A is the most difficult to execute among the strong SP reach effects, so the feeling of delay and boredom is reduced, and the reach is reduced. It is possible to enhance the interest of the production.

A pattern C in which a strong SP reach is suddenly generated, with a strong SP reach effect that is most easily executed.
It is possible to effectively reduce the feeling of delay and boredom by using the strong SP reach effect of.
However, since the strong SP reach effect of pattern C has the shortest fluctuation time among the strong SP reach effects (see FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b)), if the selection rate of the strong SP reach effect of pattern C is increased, There is a risk that the number of prize balls paid out per unit time will be too large. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even when a hold change effect that changes to red hold is performed as a look-ahead effect,
Even when a hold change effect that changes to blue hold is performed, the fluctuation time is shorter than pattern A,
Since the strong SP reach effect of pattern B, which has a longer fluctuation time than pattern C, is the easiest to execute in the strong SP reach effect, the number of prize balls paid out per unit time does not become too large. ..

Further, the strong SP reach effect of the pattern D is different from the strong SP reach effect of other patterns in that pseudo-continuous fluctuation occurs, so that there is a special feeling. Then, in the present embodiment, the strong S of the pattern D
The P-reach effect is more likely to be executed after the hold change effect that changes to red hold, which has a higher expectation, is performed among the hold change effect that changes to red hold and the hold change effect that changes to blue hold (). See FIG. 86 (d)). Therefore, a special strong S with higher expectations.
Because the P reach effect (that is, the strong SP reach effect of pattern D) can be executed.
It is possible to meet the expectations of the player and further increase the expectations, and to enhance the interest of the reach production.

Of course, before executing the special figure fluctuation display game in which the fluctuation pattern that ends with the weak SP reach effect is set, the hold change effect that changes to blue hold or red hold is performed as a look-ahead effect for the special figure change display game. It may be performed, and before the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game in which the fluctuation pattern that ends with the normal reach effect is set, the hold that changes to blue hold or red hold as a look-ahead effect for the special figure change display game. A change effect may be performed, and before the special figure change display game in which a variation pattern without reach is set is executed, the game changes to blue hold or red hold as a look-ahead effect for the special figure change display game. A pending change effect may be performed.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed (
A variation pattern selection means (a variation pattern selection means) for selecting a variation pattern of a game in a gaming machine capable of executing a special figure variation display game) and generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. The game control device 100) and the variation effect means (effect control device 300) for executing the variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means are provided, and the variation effect means is the first reach effect (normal reach). Directing) and 2nd reach directing (weak S)
It is possible to execute a P reach effect) and a third reach effect (strong SP reach effect), and the variation pattern selection means is a variation pattern that executes the third reach effect (a variation pattern that ends with a strong SP reach effect). As a result, the second reach effect is executed after the execution of the first reach effect, and the second reach effect is executed.
The first pattern (pattern A) in which the third reach effect is executed after the reach effect is executed, and the second pattern (pattern A) in which the third reach effect is executed without executing the second reach effect after the execution of the first reach effect. B) and a third pattern (pattern C) in which the third reach effect is executed without executing the first reach effect and the second reach effect can be selected, and the first pattern, the second pattern, and the third pattern can be selected. Among the patterns, the fluctuation pattern with the highest expectation that the game result will be a special result is the third pattern, and the fluctuation pattern with the lowest expectation that the game result will be a special result is the second pattern (FIG. 86). (A), (b)).
That is, among the first pattern (pattern A), the second pattern (pattern B), and the third pattern (pattern C), the fluctuation pattern with the highest degree of expectation is the third fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time. Therefore, it is possible to quickly suggest that the degree of expectation is high, and it is possible to enhance the interest of reach production.

Further, according to the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the advance notice effect means (effect control device 300) for executing the advance notice effect (look-ahead effect) suggesting the degree of expectation that the result of the game (special figure variation display game) becomes a special result. ), And the effect mode of the advance notice effect includes a first effect mode (for example, red hold) and a second effect mode (for example, blue hold) that can be suggested less than the first effect mode. When the effect mode of the advance notice effect is the first effect mode, the third pattern (pattern C) is more likely to be selected than the first pattern (pattern A) as the variation pattern of the game that is the target of the advance notice effect, and the advance notice is provided. When the effect mode of the effect is the second effect mode, the first pattern (pattern A) is more easily selected than the third pattern (pattern C) as the variation pattern of the game that is the target of the advance notice effect. (See FIG. 86 (d)).
With this configuration, when a notice effect of the first effect mode (for example, a hold change effect that changes to red hold) is performed, the first reach effect (normal reach effect) is performed.
The third pattern (Pattern C) that does not undergo the first reach effect and the second reach effect is more likely to be selected than the first pattern (Pattern A) that undergoes the second reach effect (weak SP reach effect). Therefore, the feeling of delay and boredom is reduced, and the appeal of reach production can be enhanced.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the effect mode of the advance notice effect (look-ahead effect) is the first effect mode (for example, red hold), the game (special figure variation) that is the target of the advance notice effect. When the second pattern (pattern B) is more likely to be selected than the third pattern (pattern C) as the variation pattern of the display game) and the effect mode of the advance notice effect is the second effect mode (for example, blue hold), the relevant pattern is applicable. It can be configured so that the second pattern (pattern B) is more easily selected than the first pattern (pattern A) as the variation pattern of the game to be the target of the advance notice effect (see FIG. 86 (d)).
With this configuration, the second pattern (pattern B) has a shorter fluctuation time than the first pattern (pattern A) and a longer fluctuation time than the third pattern (pattern C), regardless of the production mode of the advance notice effect. ) Is the easiest to select. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of prize balls paid out per unit time from becoming too large while reducing the feeling of delay and boredom.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed (special figure variable display game) is executed, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, it is advantageous to the player. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state, a variation pattern selection means (game control device 100) for selecting a variation pattern of a game and a variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means are executed. Means (effect control device 300) and
The variation effect means performs a reach effect in which a reach state in which the result can be a special result depending on the identification information to be stopped and displayed at the end is displayed as an effect, and a variation display of the identification information a plurality of times in one game. Pseudo-continuous effect that can execute pseudo-variation display and pseudo-continuous effect can be executed, and the variation pattern selection means is the specific reach as a variation pattern (variation pattern that ends with a strong SP reach effect) that executes a specific reach effect. The first pattern (Pattern A or Pattern B) that executes the specific reach effect after executing the reach effect (normal reach effect or weak SP reach effect) different from the effect (strong SP reach effect), and after executing the pseudo continuous effect. The second pattern (Pattern D) for executing the specific reach effect and the third pattern (Pattern C) for executing the specific reach effect without executing the reach effect and the pseudo-continuous effect different from the specific reach effect. ) And, and among the first pattern, the second pattern, and the third pattern, the fluctuation pattern with the highest expectation that the result of the game will be a special result is the second pattern.
The fluctuation pattern with the lowest expectation that the result of the game is a special result is the first pattern (see FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b)).
That is, among the fluctuation patterns that execute a specific reach effect (variation patterns that end with a strong SP reach effect), the variation pattern with the highest degree of expectation is the second pattern that undergoes a pseudo-continuous effect that is not executed by other patterns (a variation pattern that is not executed by other patterns). Pattern D). Therefore, it is possible to suggest that the expectation is high with a special fluctuation pattern, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the reach production.

Further, according to the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the advance notice effect means (effect control device 300) for executing the advance notice effect (look-ahead effect) suggesting the degree of expectation that the result of the game (special figure variation display game) becomes a special result. ), And the effect mode of the advance notice effect includes a first effect mode (for example, red hold) and a second effect mode (for example, blue hold) that can be suggested less than the first effect mode. When the effect mode of the advance notice effect is the first effect mode, the second pattern (pattern D) is more likely to be selected than the third pattern (pattern C) as the variation pattern of the game that is the target of the advance notice effect, and the advance notice is provided. When the effect mode of the effect is the second effect mode, the third pattern (pattern C) is more easily selected than the second pattern (pattern D) as the variation pattern of the game that is the target of the advance notice effect. (See FIG. 86 (d)).
With this configuration, when a notice effect of the first effect mode (for example, a hold change effect that changes to red hold) with a higher degree of expectation is performed, a pseudo continuous effect that is not executed in other patterns is performed. The second pattern (pattern D) is easily selected. Therefore, it is possible to meet the expectations of the player and further increase the expectations, and to enhance the interest of the reach production.

Note that the advance notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the result of the game (special figure variation display game) will be a special result is not limited to the advance notice effect (look-ahead effect) performed before the execution of the game, and is performed during the execution of the game. It may be a notice production to be performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the production mode of the reach effect performed in the game is distributed according to the production mode of the advance notice effect performed before the execution of the game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game is being executed (that is, that is). , The production mode of the reach effect performed in the game may be distributed according to the production mode of the advance notice effect performed during the first half fluctuation (during the fluctuation before the start of the reach).

Specifically, for example, during the first half fluctuation, as a notice effect, a step-up effect of the first effect mode (for example, a step-up effect that ends in three stages) and a second effect having a lower expectation than the first effect mode. The effect mode of the strong SP reach effect (for the strong SP reach effect) so that the step-up effect of the mode (for example, the step-up effect that ends in one step) can be executed and the relationship is as shown in FIG. 86 (d), for example. Depending on the process until development), the production mode of the advance notice production (step-up production) performed before the strong SP reach production may be assigned.

Alternatively, for example, during the first half fluctuation, as a preview effect, a pseudo-continuous effect of the first effect mode (pseudo-continuous effect in which the number of re-variation effects is 3 times) and a second effect having a lower expectation than the first effect mode. For example, FIG.
According to the production mode of the strong SP reach production (the process until it develops into the strong SP reach production), the advance notice production (pseudo-ream) performed before the strong SP reach production so as to have the relationship as shown in (d). It is also possible to distribute according to the production mode of the production).

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as the gaming machine, and is not limited to, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Pachinko machine 23 Lower plate (storage unit)
25 Production button (operation unit)
100 Game control device (variable pattern selection means)
153 Precision plate unit (operating means)
232 ball outlet (through hole)
233 Opening and closing door (opening and closing member)
252d LED board (board)
252e Front side guide recess (guidance means)
252f Left side guide recess (guidance means)
252g Right side guide recess (guidance means)
258b groove (guidance means)
267a 1st front water storage section (delay means)
268a 1st left water storage section (delay means)
269a 1st right water storage section (delay means)
300 production control device (variable production means, notice production means)
D22, D23 Distance D3 Diameter (width of through hole)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when a game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is executed and the result of the game becomes a special result.
A variation pattern selection means for selecting the variation pattern of the game, and
A variation effect means for executing a variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means is provided.
The variable effect means includes a first reach effect, a first specific reach effect different from the first reach effect, and a second specific reach effect different from the first reach effect and the first specific reach effect. It is possible to execute a reach effect including the game and a pseudo-continuous effect capable of performing a pseudo-variable display in which the variable display of the identification information is simulated a plurality of times in one game.
The variation pattern selecting means, a variation pattern for executing the reach demonstration,
A first pattern that performs the second Japanese theorem over switch effect after execution of the first reach demonstration,
A second pattern that performs the second Japanese theorem over switch effect after the execution of the pseudo communication effect,
A third pattern that performs the first reach demonstration, the second Japanese theorem over switch directing without performing the first specific reach effect and the pseudo communication effect,
A fourth pattern in which the first specific reach effect is executed after the execution of the first reach effect, and
The first reach demonstration, a fifth pattern for executing the first specific reach effect without executing the pseudo communication effect, Ri selectable der a
The first pattern, the second pattern, the third pattern, the fourth pattern, and the fifth pattern are either a case where the result of the game is not a special result or a case where the result of the game is a special result. But it is a variable pattern that can be selected,
If the result of the game is not a special result, the selectivity of the first pattern, the second pattern, the third pattern, the fourth pattern and the fifth pattern is different.
When the result of the game is a special result, the gaming machine is characterized in that the selectivity of the first pattern, the second pattern, the third pattern, the fourth pattern, and the fifth pattern are common. ..

Images